Home

52750 REV 2

1. P1 P2 P3 PA 1 10 11 20 21 30 31 40 LED Out LED Out LED Out LED Out LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used ANN BUS ID E 6 Address DIP gl switch CIC 3 O A B Og S ANN BUS Connector Figure 1 7 ANN I O Board Layout 1 8 7 5 2 Specifications Max ANN BUS Voltage 28 VDC Max Current Alarm 200 mA V Standby 35 mA V Each LED 10 mA Operating Temperature 32 to 120 F 09C to 49 e For indoor use in a dry location only MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 33 Product Description 34 1 8 7 5 3 ANN I O Connection to FACP The ANN I O connects to the FACP via the ANN BUS as illustrated in Figure 1 8 After the ANN I O is connected to the panel it must be added to the system via FACP programming Refer to the section titled ANN I O Options on page 120 LED Out LED Power not used not used ANN I O Module 48 ANN BUS ACS BUS ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited 24 VDC nonr
2. PER 173 SEN CETTE C WT Im MI 173 Proordn C De 174 174 ADNOG ATO ueste ce Gos tos cd cereos Loc o eit cS do Dive iai CE ees 174 Phone Lime oa oa a tals na 176 CETERA S FAG OM esos east 176 DEV E 177 A 177 gui PE 178 MM NEA 180 Central Station Communications ee M 181 PEIOPIPIOS im ER Pii t usc set si E ida A 182 Remote Site Upload DOoWnl03 euge eod eo Eoo ede as ek a eL Pe aa deae dva e Due 184 Remot DOwWnoad cp 184 Transterpiio 3 Pros raii E Mota Dada 185 SCCULILY POAUUITES qu e 186 Power supply Calculations ado ia i aqu edenda guru 187 cuc XC ET tas 187 Calculate the AC Branch cosa Cte tene ue os on us ot E Bede 187 8 MS 9200UDLS P N 52750 E1 01 27 09 Table of Contents Calculating the System Current Draw ien vere pote
3. 96 t CUM LCS 96 OEY LS cian doctus 96 LOOP 97 Sy Sle May SS DUNS Dit was c due M 977 6 MS 9200UDLS P N 52750 E1 01 27 09 Table of Contents Trouble euo ted oto pelouse cd cuum Nul QU Seba de 98 BAN DR ye cag MNT RS 98 Time crt 100 tes 100 p x M HM 101 sea ne Staind ae tates EN CT 101 Dayliebt Savina CER 101 AUN Er C Hc 102 PAS Positive Alarm sequence Delay s tue eui dedita 102 Ino Dela TP 103 BI d e eee 103 zu Ga eec auis ade cues men CON Ten Tene d ues Tener en 104 NAC Notification Appliance Circuit ee coo E acis ecco toos edo te Dod uas ausi var 104 eT Ale ENRICO 105 TYDE Er 106 E 106 PUIG SINETIC Coin crm 107 Coding only for not programmed as Sync Strobe Type 107 DMG T H 109 ence Dalai MENO OO NH 109 SYNC TY
4. Key slot slot as illustrated to the right It is keyed to prevent A incorrect insertion 92nackey cdr JP6 Top edge of MS 9200UDLS TB3 TB4 Main Circuit Board NACKEY card slot mpm pm pa m pn o 0 JP6 Figure 2 7 NAC Configuration Using NACKEY 2 5 2 Style Y Class B NAC Wiring 4 Style Y Class B Notification Appliance Circuits supervised and power limited 4 7 watt P N 71252 UL listed NAC1 NAC3 NAC4 NAC2 quat TD TD cpu Polarized Bells Pet Pal PS Polarized Bells Polarized Strobes ma e E Polarized Strobes Polarized Horns K K K LX Polarized Horns Notification Appliance Circuit J EE B B B B im 3 1 AEIESPER Dummy Load all unused circuit polarity shown in alarm state 4 2000 circuit number 9 1 3 0000 9200 TB3 TB4 Figure 2 8 NAC Style Y Class B Wiring MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 51 Installation 2 5 3 Style Z Class A NAC Wiring 2 Style Z Class A Notification Appliance Circuits supervised and power limited Polarized Bell Polarized Bell Polarized Strobe Polarized Strobe Polarized Horn Polarized Horn 40606 0000 Notification Appliance Circuit polarity shown in alarm state 9200nacz cdr TB3 TB4 Figure 2 9 NAC Style Z Class A Wiring 2 6 Remote Synchronization Output 52
5. eee e eee 1 CLOSET li 1 PATIENT 2 CORRIDOR 2 RESTROOM S ELECTRIC RM 3 R00M Noun Screen 2 Noun Screen 6 1 ELEVATOR li 2 ENTRANCE 3 FLOOR sese pese 1 STAIRWAY li 2 STOREROOM 3 WING Noun Screen 3 Noun Screen 7 e ete 1 GHRAGE RE EP ER EE EE pp eet 1 Z0NE fl 2 HALLWAY S HVAC RM Noun Screen 4 Noun Screen 8 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 73 Programming 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 STANDARD NOUN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN 74 Noun Adjective Screen EDIT DETECTOR 1 NOUN ADIJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION Edit Detector Screen 5 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will display screens similar to the previous Adjective and Noun Screens The new screens will list custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PS Tools utility These descriptors are selected as described in the previous sections Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the detector currently being programmed This information will be displayed as part of the device label on the display Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Detector Screen 5 will cause the following screen to be displayed DESCRIPTION 10002 NOUN ABJECT IVE Adjective Noun Screen A flashing cursor wil
6. 209 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions sssssssscsccccccsssssssssssscsscccscccccccssssssssssscccsssessssees 210 Transmission Format Between DACT and Receiver Ero oe Ce ae ie 210 Ademco Contact HI Typical PEIDEOUE 5c etin oco Euri vot n CA quis 210 Cental Stanom m M 215 MS 9200UDLS P N 52750 E1 01 27 09 10 Software Downloads In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers we make frequent upgrades to the embedded software in our products To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features we strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 It is imperative that the installer understand the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ and be familiar with the standards set forth by the following regulatory agencies e Underwriters Laboratories Standards NEPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code CAN ULC 5527 99 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems Before proceeding the installer should be familiar with the following documents N Standards NFPA
7. 1 1 S3 CLHSSROONM LOBBY 3 0FF ICE Noun Screen 1 Noun Screen 5 doeet ete eee 1 ZCLOSET 2 LORRIDOR S ELECTRIC 1 PATIENT li 2 RESTROOM 3 RDON Noun Screen 2 Noun Screen 6 e eee ee ees 1 ELEVATOR li 1 STAIRWAY 2 ENTRANCE 2 STOREROOM 5 FLOOR S WING Noun Screen 3 Noun Screen 7 1 GARAGE 1 Z0NE 2 HALLWAY S HVAC Noun Screen 4 Noun Screen 8 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will display screens similar to the previous Adjective and Noun Screens The new screens will list Custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PS Tools programming utility MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming EDIT CONTROL Description DS The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the control module currently being programmed This information will be Pai Contol A displayed as part of the device label on the display Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Control Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed 2 DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION ihag HOUN ACJECT IVE kkt Ekk sepe e pepe pepe pepe e pee Adjective Noun Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to t
8. 163 Disable na Ble Operati Ol do Ea c este etu tdt at tosta siad detta doe didus cule 163 Waterflow Careuits Operation vote ture visse anda 163 Detector FMM COU RT eT 163 Time Functions Real Time Clock be tet tente ctetuer entem ee E a 163 Svnchromzed NA CO Grd OW ya sco out dues E vati Mu eu aed eua Mao 164 COE Cs 164 PES SPU E T tod AE dr cerae D 164 POSiG ve Alarm S CQUCTIC lH 165 SPEC all yoe MLIOR a 166 Silence InbIbIC FME 25 ooo Eee opo tolus iode ule 166 c rers OO 166 Trouble R mider soto rer een aay pet a roan tnde duh 166 WaterHow Retard TIMET 166 Alarm Verification None or One Minute esses 166 bd p CT M RC 167 PRCA SPAWNS LL cL ewe 168 SV SEC MI OID 169 ZONES 170 171 MAET T 172 Bu p T EE 172 hi exc
9. S PN 52750 E1 ECN 09 062 by Honeywell Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel MS 9200UDLS MS 9200UDLSE IMPORTANT The SLC Manual Document 51309 must be referenced in addition to this manual when installing or servicing the Fire Alarm Control Panel Document 52750 E 1 01 27 09 Revision PN 52750 E1 ECN 09 062 Fire Alarm System Limitations An automatic fire alarm system typically made up of smoke detectors heat detectors manual pull stations audible warning devices and a fire alarm control panel with remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire Such a system however does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and or heat detectors be located throughout a protected premise follow ing the recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 NFPA 72 manufacturer s recommendations State and local codes and the recommendations contained in the Guides for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors which are made available at no charge to all installing dealers These docu ments can be found at http www systemsensor com html applicat html A study by the Federal Emergency Manage ment Agency an agency of the United States government indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35 of all fires While fire alarm Systems are
10. Address Select Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of the display prompting for the three digit device address When the third digit is enter 007 for example a screen will appear which will allow enabling or disabling of the selected point as illustrated in the following example EDIT DETECTOR 100801 1 ZEHHBLED YES Enable Disable Select Screen Pressing repeatedly will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No 148 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM 2 HISTORY S PROGRAM CHECK Maintenance Screen 1 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming 3 2 History Pressing 2 while viewing Maintenance Screen 1 will cause the following screen to be displayed HISTORY 1 UIEM EVENTS 2 ERHSE HISTORY History Screen The History feature allows the operator to view control panel events which have been stored in a history file in memory and erase the contents of the history file Pressing while viewing the History screen will cause the following screen to be displayed HISTOR 1 VIEW ALL 2 VIEW ALARMS S VIEW OTHER EVENTS Events Screen To view all the events which have occurred in the control panel since the history file was last erased press while viewing the Events screen To view only alarms which have occurred press 2 while viewing the Events screen To view events other than alarms press 3 The most recent ev
11. H 22 C arg SE o d 23 C Hars RT M 23 CHG 120ESBatleEy CHARGED eek um aden a east eus 23 IPDACT Internet Protocol DACT etes nx Cb DEDE 23 AINN BUS AXunincrators Modules dues idet epus doc e cerae abate Dra 24 ZNININEBA S MCIBIBE oe bss wed ue EL ties tomb bor etes oido halb fais de 24 Calculating Wiring Distance for ANN BUS Modules eene eene 24 Wiring CON MOULALION ito pecu futu as canine 26 Powering ANN BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply sse 21 AINN BUS Device Addressing oes ese EE 2 AININZS0 RemOte Fire Annunciator se edat astu recie ette eati duode deutet caede eae dede desde 28 SPECLNCALIONS abis dca 28 Install 28 MOUNE Nc T TM 28 Openine Closing eub ad EE 28 Winn s 29 ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Installation 31 SPE CIC ALI ONS eter tr 31 PRN GE Printer InstallattoTi 31 ANN EO LED Driver Module ton
12. j p PUB suonipuoo ejgnon wnwixew sdwe 00 0 104 enueyy sgt vi3 Duunp uonisod ON 4 pasay OGA bz Aq 91S eui 2 WHat Mod y 01 Soups 1 e qeieseg Jo eiqeneseJuoN DONON ayes v doo do 1 10 ejgnoi peuinbei uorsiuedng ds peswiedns diets oF Oy PN ERE PE oq sdwe 00 0 ewou ui UMOUS 5261000 peJeyi voc Jewog SERPENT 6 91 Aejas uoisiuuedns sna NNV S2V eAnsiseJ OVA 0 sduie 90 SJINOJIO pojuul jewod pesiuednsuoN ne Miu DAA bz sindino uoneorddy jeroeds Jewog uoneorddy jeroeds 1ndino uoneziuo4g2u S ojouloH JO SIS9J 8Ur Jo pu3 uJuoxZ y i jinoJro LOVN SMOJ OJ sduue 0 0 0 2 pue pa DAA HZ MA Lv syg nD cmp Cnt OVN VHOVN pyeoq jo 1uBu 1eeu Z 94S ees t OVN Ht OWN pled A3MOVN sse 2 404 uiajs S oiseg pesiedns g sse o A 1 415 vi 8 SH ZH LH SHINDIID eouei ddy uoneoynowN 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 12 Peripheral Devi
13. ae T 145 Maintenance Programmine Level 33599 0 eroe Oei ame LY sata 147 tutae Aa V Mas EM RUE CMM 148 149 Tc 150 AN IK TOS E 151 a E E 153 FONES A E E a rd 154 InstrF cllolls ded ocn uisu a aeae aeaa aeaa 156 Panc Control BUONS spag a v 156 MS 9200UDLS P N 52750 E1 01 27 09 AACKHnOoWIedee SUD 156 eed E 156 crc 156 RESET tava aan POET 156 IE EB TIC AGO c TTE ER 157 Normal Opera ol a 158 TroHbDIC Ne PALO ci dote 158 Alm Operi 160 SUDCEVISOD 161 Process Monitor 162 Hazard Tornado Condition Operation eene nnn 162 Medical Alert Condition Operation sete ves tuve tive els eae E E ies 162 NACO oe 162 Programmed Zone Operation 25 EON Sues EpL
14. fedens 1 70NE iti Noun Screen 8 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will display screens similar to the previous Adjective and Noun Screens The new screens will list Custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PS Tools utility MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 83 Programming EDIT MONITOR 1 NOUN ADIJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION xe oof oh be be oh oof b e be Edit Monitor Screen 5 84 Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the monitor module currently being programmed This information will be displayed as part of the device label on the LCD display Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 5 will cause the following screen to be displayed DESCRIPTION ihai HOUN ADCJECT IVE kkk sepes Noun Adjective Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed This information will appear on the LCD display along with the standard device label information A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position For example to enter the letter B press the 2 ABC key three times to toggle through the char
15. o 00 SMOKE CONVEN FA MON USERDEEFS m m M Y CHEAT CONVENTIONAL mo Kao KH MON USER DEF 6 mo K KH MEDICALERT MH MON USE DEF7 19 M MH HAZARDALERT 13 PA PH MON USERDEFS wo PH TORNADOALRT woo ASS H MONSUSER DEFS 13 A PH MONPHONE ooo 9 0 MON USERDEFTU 09 9 Q0 TA TH MON SUPERVISORY T HN MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 139 Programming 140 Table 3 3 Event Codes continued MON USER DEF 13 200 FS FV FS FV 330 AT AR Process mon MON USER DEF T6 00 Pomona 000 1 0 00 MON USERDEEFI o Q0 00 not used o o o 380 FT FI FB FU AT AR Q0 1 9 Q0 mtued 0 00 ET ER 302 YT YR n YT YR 351 LT LR 352 LT 00 o 00 VR 321 YA YR 322 326 37 YQ ET ER EM EN 330 EM EN 521 ET ER 522 ET ER 326 377 304 300 YQ OV mtued 9 0 602 RP 11 GENERAL ALARM 90 00 00 GENERAL SUPERVISORY 0 o 0 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 CENTRAL STATION 1 PRIMARY 2 SECONDARY S REPORT STYLE POINT Central Statio
16. Programming Following installation and wiring of the ANN 80 LCD annunciator to the FACP the annunciator must added to the system via FACP programming Refer to the programming section titled ANN BUS Options on page 118 in this manual for detailed programming information Select the LCD option for programming Trouble Response If the ANN 80 is installed but the ANN BUS is not enabled at the FACP the ANN 80 will indicate a trouble condition by NOT turning on its AC Power indicator The LCD will also display Key Bus Trouble and the piezo will sound approximately once every 10 seconds Note that the FACP will provide no indication of an ANN 80 trouble To clear the ANN 80 trouble condition enable the ANN BUS and program the address corresponding to the address set on the ANN 80 at the FACP 30 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description 1 8 7 4 ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Installation The ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface module allows the connection of a remote serial or parallel printer to the FACP for a real time log of system events detector status reports and event history The module is provided with a plastic enclosure for surface mounting Proceed with the installation as described in the following 1 Ensure that all power AC and DC has been removed from the FACP 2 Connect the ANN S PG to the FACP as illustrated in Figure 1 6 Ir Parallel ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and pow
17. increase or alteration written or verbal of the obligation of this warranty is authorized Warn HL 05 2007 fm FIre LITe ALarms by Honeywell World Headquarters 1 Firelite Place Northford CT 06472 1653 USA 203 484 7161 fax 203 484 7118 www firelite com ISO 9001
18. 133 24 Hour BURG 24 Hour 134 Entry Exit BURG Entry Exit 135 Day Night BURG Day Night 136 Outdoor BURG Outdoor 137 Tamper BURG Tamper 138 Near AlarmBURG Near Alarm General Alarms 140 140 General AlarmALARM General Alarm 141 Polling loop open ALARM Polling Loop Open 142 Polling loop short ALARM Polling Loop Short 143 Expansion module failure ALARM Exp Module Fail 144 Sensor tamper ALARM Sensor Tamper 145 Expansion module tamper ALARM Exp Module Tamper MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 211 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions 212 EVENT MESSAGE 24 Hour Non Burglary 150 and 160 150 24 Hour Non Burg 151 Gas detected 152 Refrigeration 153 Loss of heat 154 Water leakage 155 Foil break 156 Day trouble 157 Low bottled gas level 158 High temp 159 Low temp 161 Loss of air flow Fire Supervisory 200 and 210 200 Fire supervisory 201 Low water pressure 202 Low CO2 203 Gate valve sensor 204 Low water level 205 Pump activated 206 Pump failure System Troubles 300 and 310 300 System trouble 301 AC loss 302 Low system battery 303 RAM checksum bad 304 ROM checksum bad 305 System reset 306 Panel program changed 307 Self test failure 308 System shutdown 309 Battery test failure 310 Ground fault 311 No battery Sounder Relay Troubles 320 320 Sounder Relay 321 Bell 1 322 Bell 2 323 Alarm relay 324 Trou
19. SPEC PURPOSE 4ONE 1 PH5 9 OFF 2 PRESIGMHL 9S OFF S TWO STAGE 99 OFF Zone 97 98 and 99 Screen Zones 97 98 and 99 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special purpose applications In the above illustration the three zones are shown Off which means they can be programmed to function in the same manner as all other zones by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen Pressing 7 will cause the display to change to PAS 97 On Each press of the 7 key will cause the display to toggle between PAS 97 On and PAS 97 Off When Zone 97 is programmed On a PAS Positive Alarm Sequence activation of any smoke detector will cause Zone 97 to activate By assigning Zone 97 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an output device connected to the control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condition Attempting to do so will generate an error message and will be prevented by software checks Pressing 2 will cause the display to change to Pre signal 98 On Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre signal 98 On and Pre signal 98 Off When Zone 98 is programmed On a Pre signal activation of any device will cause Zone 98 to activate By assigning Zone 98 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an
20. 500 6 000 feet maximum Rpu where Ohms per 1 000 feet for various Wire Gauges see table below Exception When using the ANN RLY module the installer must ensure that the maximum 24VDC power line drop does not exceed 0 3 volts This results in the following wiring limitations Wire Gauge Maximum Wire Length 312 feet 4 787 feet 18 1 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 25 Product Description Wiring Distance Calculation Example Suppose a system is configured with the following ANN BUS modules e 3 ANN 80 Remote Fire Annunciators e ANN S PG Serial Parallel Printer Interface Module The total worst case current is calculated as follows ANN 80 Current Draw 3 X 0 040 amps 0 120 amps ANN S PG Current Draw 1 X 0 040 amps 0 040 amps 0 160 amps Using this value and referring to the Wiring Distance Table 1 1 on page 25 it can be found that the available options are Total Worst Case Current Draw 926 feet maximum using 22 Gauge wire V 2 344 feet maximum using 18 Gauge wire V 3 731 feet maximum using 16 Gauge wire 5 906 feet maximum using 14 Gauge wire 1 8 7 1 2 Wiring Configuration Figure 1 3 illustrates the wiring between the FACP and ANN BUS devices ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited lt ANN BUS ACS BUS TB9 SLC SLC SLC SLC SHIELD TB10 B A B A A B O 92udlstoann80 cdr O 24V 24V NON
21. 59 Proerammins DUSEN a a a 59 User PLO A atin Foro 60 HDI TE oo cojos eT x 61 Proeramiming Sereens DeScPIDLIO DD 61 Programinio and 62 Master Proorammiune evel T TNT 63 D 64 Port PEIOBEAIL E vetuit ip a 65 gt aia gos da de du sud 65 NRI 65 Delete DECC gc 66 BI rero PR Ncc 66 Module Debet t ett uie n edo ba ebbe talea ibd n buo n UE 75 a ecc ce tts e onda cutus 75 Bard 76 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module sssssssseeneeneenenennne nennen nnne nnne nnn nnn nnns 76 Edit Module Screen for Control Modules Meta eee biet Ua 85 ZS e fa earn ot terse ERE NUR 92 Iur Tc 02 MIS a ccr 93 FONE 99 1 93 OT ED C 94 Zones Enabled ee MC nS 94 cT aO 94 bus crc TT 95 DOS A 96
22. 8 Mount the chassis to the backbox by aligning the two mounting tabs with the slots in the backbox then position the two mounting hole tabs over the studs with nuts located in the upper portion of the backbox 9 Slide the tabs located on the bottom of the chassis into the mounting slots in the backbox by pressing the chassis down 10 Secure the chassis to the backbox by tightening the two mounting nuts 10 32 at the top and to ensure proper grounding use a 3 8 nut driver or socket 11 If the main circuit board is not already attached to the chassis install it by positioning the ten mounting holes over the studs on the chassis and secure with the supplied screws 12 Connect the Standard XRM 24B E Transformer plug to Transformer 1 Connector J10 on the FACP main circuit board 13 Connect the Optional XRM 24B E Transformer plug to Transformer 2 Connector J11 on the FACP main circuit board 14 Complete the installation as detailed in the following sections Optional XRM 24B E Transformer Installation p i Pp Optional XRM 24B E Transformer mounting slot Slide top flange WwW Gad 4 b Standard XRM 24B E Transforme a of XRM 24B E _ P LE ge into slot at top left 7j Dmm of chassis E 2 see M won a 1 4 E A Ld mm lt q Mounting Studs Slide bottom flange of XRM 24B E int
23. CAUTION HIGH VOLTAG TRANSFORMER 2 T T Aiuouiny FHV 24 Jo je oJdde eui Ajuo Jeduunf 51 JO suoneouinuepti 415 VdAN 1N SPIOA Jedunr ejgesiq Lr am mam PUNOS jjueniodui 37189510 OL 3AOIN3H g 560 siinejep Aiojoe4 peo Oo 1 A3MOVN g 50 JO V SSe O 40 SOVN 8SSVIO v 82 WN 8SSV IO 8 LOVN Buisn 7 p 1eBJeuo K1e1eq P y dOV4 e qesip Jeduun siy eAouJ8H Zdf 3unus 1eduunf a mw gg 49J94 uoneuuoJul BULIM f 2 104 9 Z suid Jaduunl Jomog ejqereses 99 IW rust Seem ee EA umous se Ld d V g a v 8 N NZ Q 8 suid 4eduunf 8 q9 8S9JUON 2 Es 2 9 isd 2 2 e 0 id um ga M LA oo 00 00 m ON Ng ON ONcgy v Ong mum var cai m cal mm Lgl O 1 PE DONON JONON 99NON g ee ae BuueMod 104 ejqeuns jus pue 9 Aejas suoyelounuue BuLemod 10 ejgeins 1 Seol ep e qesseJppe JO SSO Buum uo uoneuuoJui
24. EXE Sr H JJOSSIM LMS o sepeJ6dn asemyos 40196J jo uonisod NMOG YOUMS JO uonisod ewou s dN cit OWN L OVN pJe9 A3MOVN Duisn v SSe 2 JO peinByuoo 9 JIALX YOUMS e qeu3 peog use J Jed sdu Jamo pesiwedng v ssel Z eis CH LE OVN 2 eouegiddy uoneornoN pejeisul si JINLXT KeJaJ 1 E e qeue sy no 7 Q Z UJOOJ SWS UIU IM 100 OS AUN dOV4 JO jueuudinbe peisi H 13 404 JO 19 ULId oj cec VI3 papu Jod dwy 9L 1nej ejqesip oL Sjoe1uoo eja1 Aejay pexi painByuoo 1ed uoneoiddy jerioeds G ZH 09 OVA 0 0 sduie Q ZH 09 OVA 021 peyur 4e oduow pesiAsedns JoMOd OV HIHV3 LNSN LOH a in C K orr O AV IdSIG paiuui jooduou pesiuiedns ve iNOILQ VO ASVLIOA HSIH O JOJOBUUOD JeuJJ0JSuei TRANSFORMER 1 E jo n JOJOBUUOD Z JeuJJ0JSUei
25. F rower Supervision 6 X 0 025 X 0 025 X 0 025 Relays P3550 6 X 0 00050 X 0 00050 D350 6 X 0 00030 2 maximum alarm draw for all devices D B501BH amp B501BHT X 0 001 B ARE R X 0 00050 V JU X 0 00040 VIM UU IU X 0 00550 urrent Draw trom I nonalarm Sum each column for totals Primary Non Alarm Primary Alarm Table Footnote All eight ACM SRF relays activated on a single module All annunciator LEDs on LDM 32F with LEDs on If using the Reverse Polarity Alarm output add 0 005 amps if using the Reverse Polarity Trouble output add another 0 005 amps Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for standby current Must use compatible listed Power Supervision Relay Maximum alarm current for each sounder base is 0 015 amps which must be supplied by aux 24VDC source Current limitation of Terminal TB3 amp TB4 circuits is 2 5 amps per NAC The total standby current must include both the nonresettable resettable TB1 Terminals 1 amp 2 and resettable TB1 Terminals 3 amp 4 power Caution must be taken to ensure that current drawn from these outputs during alarm does not exceed maximum ratings specified Current limitations of TB3 amp TB4 circuits is 2 5 amps per NAC output and 0 3 amps per special application auxiliary power output 10 Total current draw listed above cannot exceed 6 0 amps Secondary Non Alarm z BR WN MS 9200UDLS PN 52
26. Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 4 will display the following screen PHONE LINE PRIMARY TOUCHTONE SECONDARY TOUCHTONE S SUPERW PHONE LINE The second and third lines of this screen indicate that both the Primary and Secondary phone lines have been configured for touchtone dialing operation Pressing 3 while viewing the Phone Line screen will cause the following screen to be displayed SUPERVISE PHONE LINE PHONE LINE 2 This screen indicates whether or not Phone Line 2 is being supervised In this example Phone Line 2 No indicates the phone line is not being supervised 4 22 12 Central Station EE Pressing 5 while viewing Read Status Screen 4 will display the following screens 1 ANNUNCTATORS 2 PHONE LINE S CENTRAL STATION Read Status Screen 4 CENTRAL STATION 11 REPORT ING ENABLED REPORT BOTH CALL LIMIT 15 Central Station Screen 1 CENTRAL STATION fi 1 PRIMARY 2 SECONDARY S REPORT STYLE Central Station Screen 2 Central Station Screen 1 indicates whether the Central Station Reporting is enabled or disabled if the Reports will be sent to one or both the Primary and Secondary Central Station phone numbers and the Call Limit for DACT trouble calls within a 24 hour period 176 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions Central Station Screen 2 provides information on the Primary and Secondary Central Station programming which includes Test Time
27. while viewing the Banner Screen will select the blank factory default banner setting and display the following screen FACTORY BANNER Factory Banner Screen MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming Pressing the Enter key will store this selection in nonvolatile memory and return the display to the Banner Screen Pressing 2 while viewing the Banner Screen will cause the following screens to be displayed USER DEFINED BANNER PRESS ENTER IF OK X User Defined Banner Screen 1 USER BANNER LINE 2 PRESS ENTER IF OK a ete NY User Defined Banner Screen 2 These screens allow the programmer to enter a two line custom banner A flashing cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of each display A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered into each screen for a total of two lines with 40 characters After entering up to 20 characters in the first screen press Enter to view the second screen Enter up to 20 characters in the second screen in the same manner or just press Enter if a second banner line is not being entered To quickly clear the current banner press the CLR key To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position For example to enter the letter B press the 2 ABC key three times to toggle through the characters 1 A and B Press the right arrow key t
28. 2 Remove appropriate amount of wire insulation 3 Connect the wiring from the FACP ANN BUS to annunciator TB1 terminals 3 A amp 4 B Make certain to connect A to A and B to B 4 If appropriate connect the wiring going to the next device on the ANN BUS to TB1 terminals 3 amp 4 Make certain to connect A to A and B to B 5 Connect the wiring from the 24 VDC power source to annunciator TB1 terminals 1 amp 2 Make certain to observe proper polarity 6 If appropriate connect the power wiring going to the next device to terminals 1 amp 2 Make certain to observe proper polarity 7 After all connections are made remove extra wire from inside of annunciator by dressing it neatly through wire channel with any excess wire pushed back through hole into electrical box MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 29 Product Description ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited ANN BUS TB1 ULL 24 VDC nonresettable ANN BUS ACS BUS TB9 SLC SLC SL TB10 B C SLC SHIELD owen 24V 24V NON RST RST POWER POWER AB un FACP 92udlstoann80 edr Figure 1 5 ANN 80 Wiring to FACP The following table shows the ANN 80 connections to the MS 9200UDLS MS 9200UDLS ANN 80 TB1 Terminal GND on TBI Terminal 1 Terminal PWR 1 Terminal 2 Terminal ACS on TB9 Terminal 3 A Terminal ACS on TB9 Terminal 4 B
29. 2 4TH 3 5TH Adjective Screen 1 Adjective Screen 5 1 FLOOR 1 2 FLOOR 2 S FLOOR 3 IFLOOR 1 0 Adjective Screen 2 Adjective Screen 6 i REAR li 1 FLOOR 4 2 UPPER 2 FLOOR 5 3 LOWER 3 RDON Adjective Screen 3 Adjective Screen 7 ete 1 2 FIRST S3 2HD Adjective Screen 4 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 1 STANDARD RHDJIECTIUE 2 STANDARD NOUN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Noun Adjective Screen programmed a OC 1 BASEMENT 2 BO ILER S3 CLHSSROONM Noun Screen 1 1 CLOSET 2 CORRIDOR S ELECTRIC Noun Screen 2 jeden sedes 1 ELEURTOR 2 ENTRHHCE 3 FLOOR Noun Screen 3 PEE BP PR EE EE pp eee 1 GHRAGE 2 HALLWAY S HVAC RM Noun Screen 4 Programming Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following screen s to be displayed Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Noun screens Press the number corresponding to the noun that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the monitor module currently being e eee 1 ZKITCHEHN LOBBY 3 0FF ICE Noun Screen 5 1 PATIENT li 2 RESTROOM 3 RO0M Noun Screen 6 e ete 1 STAIRWAY 2 STOREROOM S WING Noun Screen 7
30. 4 NACs 2 SLC Loop Detector Addresses 65 99 not usec not used not usec The MS 9200UDLS must be programmed for the annunciators installed on the system Refer to Annunciators on page 115 for information on annunciator programming Make certain to program the annunciator addresses that have been physically installed on the system Note The 8 General System Status Points include the following General Alarm Alarm Silenced Battery Fault General Trouble System Off Normal NAC Fault General Supervisory AC Loss MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 117 Programming 3 6 9 1 3 ANN BUS Options Pressing 3 for ANN BUS Options while viewing the Annunciators screen will cause the following screens to be displayed ANN BUS 1 ENABLED HO 2 HODULES INSTALLED S HUTO CONF I GURE ANN BUS Screen 1 ANN BUS 1 HHH 59 PG OPTIONS 2 HHN 88 OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 2 A printer module graphic annunciator module LCD annunciator module LED annunciator module and relay module can be programmed into the MS 9200UDLS system These devices communicate with the FACP over the ANN BUS terminals on the control panel 3 6 9 1 3 1 ANN BUS Enabled The ANN BUS must be enabled if any modules are connected to the ANN BUS terminals To enable the ANN BUS press while viewing ANN BUS screen 1 so that the display reads ANN BUS Enabled Yes Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between ANN BUS Enabled Ye
31. ACTIVE SUPERVISORY SADI gt lt NOUN ZH 010506 lids Note that like alarms supervisory signals latch except when programmed for supervisory autoresettable and can be assigned to software zones Supervisory events do not cause resound as do other alarm conditions Open circuits in supervisory wiring are processed by the control panel the same way as other trouble conditions Refer to Alarm Operation on page 160 for a description of the information displayed on the control panel LCD MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 161 Operating Instructions 4 7 Process Monitor Operation Process Monitor operation will initiate the following events e piezo sounder pulses second On and second Off The LCD displays a process monitor message along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date Communicate the process monitor condition to the Central Station Relays programmed for process monitoring will be activated The alarm relay is not activated e NACSs will not activate e Silenced alarms are not resounded e Timers are not started e Store event in history buffer e Process Monitor condition must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset Note that like supervisories process monitor signals latch except when programmed for process monitor autoresettable and can be assigned to software zones 4 8 Hazard Tornado Condition Operation Hazard Tornado Condition o
32. Qutput Circuits Manual The following output circuits are available on the FACP Special Application Power V 24 VDC Resettable smoke detector power output 0 300 amps maximum V 24 VDC Nonresettable or Resettable power output 0 300 amps maximum e 24 VDC Battery Charger up to 18 AH batteries NAC Notification Appliance Circuits NACS configurable for four Style Y Class B or two Style Z Class A using NACKEY card in JP6 are provided with various programmable features Relays One fixed and two fully programmable Form C dry contact relays are provided The fixed fail safe relay monitors system trouble and the two programmable relays are factory default programmed for system alarm and system supervisory Contacts are rated 2 0 amps 30 VDC resistive and 0 5 amps 30 VAC resistive The programmable relays can be programmed for the following operations fire alarm trouble supervisory supervisory auto resettable DACT communication failure process monitor process monitor auto resettable hazard alert medical alert AC loss 1 5 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter Two modular phone jacks allow easy connection to telephone lines Modular jacks are labeled PH1 for Primary Phone Line and PH2 for Secondary Phone Line Two telephone line active red LEDs are provided as well as a green Kissoff LED The integral digital communicator provides the following functions e Line Seizure takes control of the phone li
33. Resettable Power Relay Type Ignore Open Circuit HVAC SHUTDN Relay Type Ignore Open Circuit Note 1 When using a control relay module to supply resettable power to conventional 2 wire smoke detectors the addressable monitor module must be programmed for Smoke Conventional operation 2 For HVAC SHUTDN description refer to Control Module Operation on page 208 01 27 09 87 Programming 88 EDIT CONTROL 1 ENABLED Z T YPE 5 5 Edit Control Screen 2 EDIT CONTROL 1 WALK TEST 2 20HE ASSIGNMENT t Edit Control Screen 3 EDIT COHTROL 1 NOUN ADIJECTIVE 2 DESCRIPTION Edit Control Screen 4 Silenceable The Silenceable selection allows the programmer to select whether output devices connected to the control module can be silenced either by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by enabling Autosilence Pressing the 3 key while viewing Edit Control Screen 2 will enable the Silenceable feature causing the display to read Silenceable Yes Repeated presses of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Silenceable Yes and Silenceable No Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation To enable devices which are connected to a control module for the Walktest feature press while viewing the Edit Control Screen 3 until the display reads Walkt
34. be displayed DAYLIGHT SAYINGS 1 1 ZEHHBLED YES 2 START MONTH MAR S STHRT WEEK WEEK 2 Daylight Savings Screen 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS 1 1 END MONTH NOW 2 END WEEK 1 Daylight Savings Screen 2 Pressing while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 1 will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No The control panel will automatically update the time for daylight savings time when Enabled Yes is selected Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 1 will display another screen which allows the programmer to select the month that daylight savings time will begin In this sub screen pressing will select March 2 will select April and 3 will select May 01 27 09 101 Programming SYSTEM SETUP 1 TIMERS 2 NAC 3 RELAY S System Setup Screen 2 TIMERS 1 PAS DELAY B 2 PRE SIGNAL S WATERFLOW Timer Screen 1 102 Pressing 3 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 1 will display two sub screens which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings time will begin In the first sub screen pressing will select the first week 2 will select the second week and 3 will select the third week while in the second sub screen pressing will select the fourth week and 2 will select the last week of the selected month Pressing while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 2 will display another screen which allows the program
35. e 80 character LCD display backlit Real time clock calendar with daylight savings time control e History file with 1 000 event capacity e Advanced fire technology features V Automatic drift compensation V Maintenance alert V Detector sensitivity test capability NFPA 72 compliant V Automatic device type code verification V Point trouble identification Waterflow selection per module point e Alarm verification selection per detector point e Walktest silent or audible PAS Positive Alarm Sequence and Pre signal per point NFPA 72 compliant e Silence inhibit timer option per NAC e Autosilence timer option per NAC e Continuous March Time Temporal or California code for main circuit board NACS with two stage capability e Selectable strobe synchronization per NAC e Remote Acknowledge Alarm Silence Reset and Drill via addressable modules ACS annunciators or ANN 80 Remote annunciator e Auto program learn mode reduces installation time Reports two devices set to the same address e Password and key protected nonvolatile memory e User programmable password Fully programmable from local keypad or optional keyboard Optional PK CD contains PS Tools utility for local or remote Upload Download of program and data Compatible with Fire Lite s newer series devices in LiteSpeed and CLIP mode refer to SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable devices Compatible with legacy Fire Lite 300 Series devic
36. e Walktest Yes No e PAS Positive Alarm Sequence Yes No for detectors only e Pre Signal Yes No for detectors and monitor modules e Zone Assignments five maximum e Chamber Value e Adjective Noun descriptor e Silenceable Yes No for control modules 4 22 2 Zones READ STATUS 1 SYSTEM POINT Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 1 will cause the following screens to be gt 70NES displayed 3 POWER Read Status Screen 1 ra 1 Z0NES INSTALLED 2 0NES ENABLED S Z0NES DISABLED Zones Screen 1 ONES 1 SFECIHL PURPOSE 2 Z0NE S Z0NE MESSAGE Zones Screen 2 From the preceding screens the control panel operator can view e Zones Installed all software zones programmed into the system 99 maximum e Zones Enabled all software zones that are enabled Zones Disabled all software zones that have been disabled Special Purpose on or off programming for Special Purpose Zones 97 reserved for PAS 98 reserved for Pre signal and 99 reserved for Two Stage Zone Type the Type assigned to each installed zone default is Alarm Zone Message the Message assigned to each installed zone 170 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Operating Instructions 4 22 3 Power Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 1 will cause the following screens to be displayed POWER BATTERY 24 RST Power Screen 1 POWER CHARGER MAC 1 2
37. 115812 To change the programming for the displayed module press the keyboard down arrow key to view the following Edit Monitor screens In the preceding example V Normal indicates that the module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel enabled V lt ADJ gt lt NOUNS represents the adjective and noun which have been programmed describing the location of the displayed device V ZNNN represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is assigned to NNN the two digit zone number from 000 099 V 1M012 represents the Loop Device type and Device address 1 SLC Loop 1 M Module and 012 Module Address 012 W or indicates whether or not the device is programmed for Walktest W programmed for walktest 2 not programmed for walktest MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Zl Programming 78 If the selected address corresponds to a control module a screen displaying information about the control module with the selected address will be displayed as shown in Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 85 If the selected address corresponds to a monitor module a screen displaying information about the module with the selected address will be displayed as illustrated in the following NORMAL MONITOR SHD T7 NOLENS 1 12 EDIT MONITOR 1812 li 1 ZEHHBLED YES 2 TYPE MONITOR Edit Monitor Screen 2 EDIT
38. 405 Deferred Open Close Opening not used Closing not used 406 Cancel OPENING Cancel Closing not used 407 Remote arm disarm OPENING Remote CLOSING Remote 408 Quick arm Opening not applicable CLOSING Quick arm 409 Keyswitch Open Close OPENING Keyswitch CLOSING Keyswitch Remote Access 410 411 Callback request made REMOTE Callback Requested restore not applicable 412 Success download accessREMOTE Successful Access restore not applicable 413 Unsuccessful access REMOTE Unsuccessful Access restore not applicable 414 System shutdown REMOTE System Shutdown 415 Dialer shutdown REMOTE Dialer Shutdown 416 Success upload access REMOTE Successful Access restore not applicable Access Control 420 421 Access denied ACCESS Access Denied User restore not used 422 Access report by user ACCESS Access Gained User restore not used System Disables 500 and 510 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 213 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions 2 4 EVENT MESSAGE Sounder Relay Disables 520 520 Sounder Relay disable DISABLE Sounder Relay 52 Bell 1 disable DISABLE Bell Siren 1 522 Bell 2 disable DISABLE Bell Siren 2 523 Alarm relay disable DISABLE Alarm Relay 524 Trouble relay disable DISABLE Trouble Relay 525 Reversing relay disable DISABLE Reversing Relay 526 Bell 3 disable DISABLE Bell Siren 3 527 Bell 4 disable DISABLE Bell Siren 4 System Periphe
39. 5 207 4 128 QU O O O O Q OQ QOO O0 O O Q O O O50 0 O10 O0O0O0Q0 O00 13 23 Hinge Slot for optiona Dress Panel It 1 00 2 54 5 ON Figure 2 3 MS 9200UDLS Cabinet Mounting MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 1 01 27 09 47 Installation eos LM PAS e zem eas pos ees 9 NS 14 NN 14 NN I4 NN 14 NA 14 NN 14 NN 14 NN i OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0O0O0 v A SP ve p 5 A e Ws z Depth 5207 13 23 cm Door 16 821 4273 ___ 257 Backbox 16 65 42 29 cm 13 353 3 cm cm Door 19 26 48 92 cm Backbox 19 0 48 26 cm Right Side Left Side O OO QOOOOO0O0 00009 O10 0 0 Bottom 27 537 Figure 2 4 MS 9200UDLS Cabinet Dimensions An optional Trim Ring P N TR CE is also available for semi flush mount installations 48 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 9050udcab cdr 01 27 09 Installation 2 3 Power WARNING Several different sources of power c
40. 6 35 mm diameter holes located in the backbox The key slots are located at the top of the backbox and the two securing holes at the bottom Carefully unpack the system and check for shipping damage Mount the cabinet in a clean dry vibration free area where extreme temperatures are not encountered The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the panel Locate the top of the cabinet approximately 5 feet 1 5 m above the floor with the hinge mounting on the left Determine the number of conductors required for the devices to be installed Sufficient knockouts are provided for wiring convenience Select the appropriate knockout s and pull the conductors into the box wiring should be in accordance with the National and or Local codes for fire alarm systems 2 1 Mounting Backbox grounding stud A See Page MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 The circuit board contains static sensitive components Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any boards so that static charges are removed from the body Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies To prevent damage to the circuit board and to facilitate backbox mounting the chassis with main circuit board and transformer can be easily removed Loosen the two 3 8 nuts securing the top flanges of the chassis then slide the chassis up to free it from the lower tabs Place the chassis assembly ins
41. 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 5 5 6 Zone 1 z ME A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each main circuit board NAC BB BB Pressing while viewing Screen 3 displays the following screen 2 SIL INHIBITED NAC Screen 3 ASSIGNMENT 24k Zkt Z4ek Zap Zone Screen Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to the selected NAC The factory default for an unprogrammed device is ZOO for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this NAC The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone ZOO When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the NAC Screen 3 which will show the zone assignments just entered 3 6 5 5 7 Silence Inhibited The Silence Inhibit feature when enabled prevents the silencing of the selected main circuit board NAC for a period of one minute Resetting the FACP will also be prevented for one minute while the NAC programmed for silence inhibit is activated Pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen 3 will cause the display to change from the factory default of Silence Inhibit No to Silence Inhibit Yes Each press of the 2 key will cause the displa
42. ANN RLY relay module can be mounted inside the FACP main circuit board chassis Refer to documentation supplied with the relay module 38 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description 1 8 7 7 4 ANN RLY Connection to FACP Figure 1 13 illustrates the ANN RLY board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN BUS ID number 8 ANN BUS and power wiring supervised and power limited ANN RLY 1 ANN BUS ACS BUS SLC SLC SLC SLC SHIELD TB10 B A A B 000000 24 24V NON RST RST POWER POWER FACP Figure 1 13 ANN RLY Connection to FACP 1 8 7 8 ANN BUS Audio Panel Control WARNING Disconnect all sources of power AC and DC before installing or removing any wiring The FACP is capable of providing automated activation of the ACC 25 50 ZS T zoned system speaker circuits To do this the FACP must be enabled to communicate with the ACC 25 50ZS Audio Panel over the ANN BUS refer to ANN BUS Enabled on page 118 This is accomplished by programming the Audio Panel ANN BUS address into the FACP refer to Modules Installed on page 118 For details on setting the ANN BUS address and programming the audio panel refer to the ACC 25 50ZS Series Audio Panel manual document 51889 The ACC 25 50Z5 Seri
43. Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 20 Zone 21 Zone 22 Zone 23 Zone 24 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 25 Zone 26 Zone 27 Zone 28 Zone 29 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm ANN RLED Module 2 Zone 30 Zone 31 Zone 32 Zone 33 Zone 34 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 35 Zone 36 Zone 37 Zone 38 Zone 39 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 40 Zone 41 Zone 42 Zone 43 Zone 44 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 45 Zone 46 Zone 47 Zone 48 Zone 49 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 50 Zone 51 Zone 52 Zone 53 Zone 54 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 55 Zone 56 Zone 57 Zone 58 Zone 59 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Zone Ranges 60 89 and 90 99 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN RLED module 124 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming ANN LED Zone Option Alarm Trouble and Supervisory If Zone is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms troubles and supervisories the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the system st
44. CMF 300 1 63 14 64 16 66 18 68 20 70 23 73 25 75 27 77 29 79 31 81 33 83 34 84 36 86 38 88 40 90 42 92 44 94 46 96 47 97 49 99 m 94 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Software Zones Table A 3 Blank Detector Programming Sheet 1 of 2 DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Zone ADJ Address Device Zone ADJ NOUN Type Number NOUN Type Number 01 51 03 53 05 55 07 57 10 60 12 62 14 64 16 66 18 68 20 70 23 73 25 75 27 77 29 79 31 81 33 83 34 84 36 86 38 88 40 90 42 92 44 94 46 96 47 97 49 99 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 195 Software Zones Table A 4 Blank Module Programming Sheet 1 of 2 MONITOR CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Zone ADJ Address Device Zone ADJ NOUN Type Number NOUN Type Number 01 Sd 03 53 05 55 07 57 10 60 12 62 14 64 16 66 18 68 20 70 23 73 25 19 27 ad 29 79 31 81 33 83 34 84 36 86 38 88 40 90 42 92 44 94 46 96 47 97 49 99 m 96 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Default Programming APPENDIX B Default Programming The following table provides a list of the programming options and their factory default settings Program Option Factory Default i Program Option Factory Default Detector Programming Detector Type _ SmokePhoo _ Detector Verification Of O Speo _ DeecorWalkes Yes AmmmcatrTemimiMod No DeeorPAS O oo Anuncio ACS Mode No
45. Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to one of the Notification Appliance Circuits Use the up and down arrow keys to view all NACs Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any output zones have not been programmed to at least one input zone Use the up and down arrow keys to view all zones Pressing 3 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to at least one output zone Use the up and down arrow keys to view all zones 4 22 9 History Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 3 will display the following screen HISTORY 1 VIEW ALL 2 UIEM ALARMS S VIEW OTHER EVENTS The operator can view all events which have been stored in the history file only alarms or other events such as troubles or supervisories by pressing the corresponding number key 4 22 10 Annunciators READ STATUS 1 ANNUNCTATORS Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 4 will display the following screens 2 PHONE LINE S CENTRAL STATION Read Status Screen 4 HRRLIMNLC I HTORS TERM ENABLED YES 2 HCS OPTIONS S ANN BUS OPTIONS Annunciator Screen 174 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Operating Instructions The Annunciator Screen indicates if Terminal mode options are enabled or disabled Pressing 2 for ACS Optio
46. Communicator on page 54 for an illustration of the proper installation of this equipment Important The DACT must not be used to dial a phone number that is call forwarded MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Product Description 1 10 3 Telephone Company Rights and Warnings The telephone company under certain circumstances may temporarily discontinue services and or make changes in its facilities services equipment or procedures which may affect the operation of this control panel However the telephone company is required to give advance notice of such changes or interruptions If the control panel causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company reserves the right to temporarily discontinue service Advance notification will be provided except in cases when advance notice is not practical In such cases notifica tion will be provided as soon as possible The opportunity will be given to correct any problems and to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary DO NOT CONNECT THIS PRODUCT TO COIN TELEPHONE GROUND START OR PARTY LINE SERVICES When the control panel activates premise phones will be disconnected Two separate phone lines are required Do not connect both telephone interfaces to the same telephone line The control panel must be connected to the public switched telephone network upstream as first device of any private telephone system at the protected premi
47. E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions Third line in display Z000 indicates the zone programmed to this device which in this example is general alarm Zone 000 Note that a single device can be programmed to five different zones but only the first zone will be displayed Fourth line in display V Time the current time in this example is 0 00A which represents 10 00 AM V Date the current month day and year in this example is 07 for January 08 for the 8th day of the month and 0 7 for the year 2001 V Device Address 001 in this example represents SLC Loop M represents a module and 001 represents device address 001 4 6 Supervisory Operation Supervisory operation is similar to alarm operation but with the following differences The piezo sounder pulses 2 second On and second Off The Supervisory LED flashes 1 2 second On and 1 2 second Off The LCD displays the status label Active Supervisory along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date Communicate the supervisory condition to the Central Station The supervisory relay is activated The alarm relay is not activated NACS will not activate Silenced alarms are not resounded Timers are not started Store event in history buffer Terminate upload or download communications Supervisory condition must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset A typical Supervisory event would be displayed as illustrated in the following
48. In Walktest Screen From this screen it is possible to view the walktest log untested system points or a summary of the addressable devices tested during the current walktest The user can select between any of these screens without interrupting the current walktest session The walktest session will not end until the Unit In Walktest screen is exited by pressing the Escape key Pressing for View Walktest Log while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will cause screen similar to one of the following two screens to be displayed ALARM MONITOR HO EVENTS IM NORTH CLASSROOM WALKTEST LOG 24H 1 1 15 812505 1Mbbe MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 If there are no events in the current walktest session the first screen will be displayed indicating no events have been stored in the walktest log If any events have been stored a screen similar to the second will be displayed indicating the latest event As walktest events occur the display will change to indicate the latest event stored events can be scrolled on the screen by pressing the up or down arrow keys To return to the first event press the st Event key 01 27 09 113 Programming Pressing 2 for View Points while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display one of the following screens UNTESTED POINTS 818 HO POINTS 10001 SMOKE 2 SYSTEM HOT TESTED 114 If the system has no points installed the first screen will be displayed I
49. MONITOR 1 12 li 1 PRE SIGNAL Edit Monitor Screen 3 EDIT MONITOR 1812 li 1 WALK TEST YES 2 Z0NE ASSIGNMENT BB ek E Edit Monitor Screen 4 EDIT MONITOR 1MB812 4 1 ZHD JIECT IUE NOUH 2 DESCRIPTION delete eee eet Edit Monitor Screen 5 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 EDIT MONITOR 1 ENABLED 2 TYPE MONITOR Edit Monitor Screen 2 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming Enable Disable Module To Enable or Disable the monitor module press the key while viewing the Edit Module Screen 2 Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No If Enabled No is selected the module will not be polled by the control panel preventing the module from reporting alarms and troubles to the panel The control panel will indicate a system trouble condition and the Disable LED with turn on if any devices are disabled Type Monitor Using the PK CD Upload Download utility program unique user defined monitor types can be created and loaded into the FACP for later use The FACP response to the activation of a user defined type is the same as most previous standard types in the list thus allowing a variety of user defined types and responses To select the type of monitor module being programmed press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Monitor Screen 2 This will cause the control panel to display the following Monitor Type Screens MONITOR TYPE 1 PULL STATION 2 USER D
50. Maintenance presignal yellow Alarm Silenced signals yellow e Disabled yellow e Battery fault yellow Ground fault yellow Key Panel Mounted on the main circuit board the key panel includes a window for the LCD display and LED indicators as listed above The key panel which is visible with the cabinet door closed has 25 keys including a 16 key alpha numeric pad similar to a telephone keypad Function keys e Acknowledge Step AC POWER Alarm Silence PY SUPERVISORY IBS DISABLED 5 e Drill PY TROUBLE BATTERY Reset lamp test ACK STEP NE SN Service program keys e Keys labeled 1 to 9 A4 r4 lt key dikey 7 0 y MODE E e 0 recall key VAPA 7 Ist Event key e Clear key Figure 1 2 Membrane Display Panel e Escape key Mode key e Four cursor keys up down left and right e Enter key Local Piezo Sounder A piezo sounder provides separate and distinct pulse rates for alarm trouble and supervisory conditions 18 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description 1 4 Circuits SLC Communication Loop One SLC loop is provided standard on the FACP main circuit board The SLC loop configurable for NFPA Style 4 6 or 7 provides communication to addressable detectors monitor initiating device and control output device modules Refer to the LT SLC Wiring manual for information on wiring devices Reference
51. Module Installation on page 56 for detailed information e m EAE us Ho RS82 Remote Station Receiver UL listed supet fur Poe termina Refer to Instruction Manual for Remote Station Receiver Jte pO PiN Model RS82 o REMOTE STATION MASTER BOARD RSM 31 OPTIONAL ZONE CARD RSZ CIRCUIT SIOE n 3 OPTIONAL ZONE CARD 852 CIRCUIT SIDE oo Bia Q ee 2 INPUT 4 OPTIONAL ZONE CARO R 2 CIRCUIT SIDE HoH Xue ee ee S44 2 5 OPTIONAL ZONE CARD 882 CIRCUIT SIDE A 2 ALARM Ce o SIGNA Me Polarity Shown is Z OPTIONAL ES d zl rA Normal Standby INPUT OPTIONAL ZONE CARD RSZ CIRCUIT SIDE LES INPUT 8 OPTIONAL ZONE l 2 82 CIRCUIT SIDE xu 2 n SIGNAL INPUT 9 OPTIONAL ZONE CARD RSZ CIRCUIT SIDE PEE 19 tevin RECOMMENDED TYP S 5 POWER POWE C 260 TRANSFORMER POWER SONIC PS 1265 YUASA NPG OR EQUIVALENT MAXIMUM BATTERY SIZE 60X 26 X 4I 8 D pom OL Power limited 1 Y 9 L _ om OL stop Dummy load with a 4 7KQ 4 watt resistor when connection is made Cutting TBL Jumper allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system
52. NAC 2 amp 4 CLASS B JP6 H3JINHOJSNVH L e HJINHOJSNVHL 01 27 09 7 J5 J6 JP3 a KISSOFF ed EA 4XTMF i a J7 ALARM Y SILENCED GROUND AC POWER FIRE ALARM Bn ACK STEP X ALARM X _ d ec PRI ACTIVE SEC ACTIVE RESET J13 J12 PRLPHONELINE SEC PHONELINE Mounting Screw Access Holes 3 E Figure 2 14 Keypad Display Removal 55 Installation 56 2 9 1 AXTMF Transmitter Module Installation The 4XTMF provides a supervised output for a local energy municipal box transmitter in addition to alarm and trouble reverse polarity A jumper option allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists A disable switch allows disabling of the transmitter output during testing to prevent accidental calling of the monitoring service Local Energy Municipal Box Service NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems Supervisory Current 5 0 mA Trip Current 350 mA subtracted from notification appliance power Coil Voltage 3 65 VDC Maximum Coil Resistance 14 6 ohms Maximum allowable wire resistance between panel and trip coil 3 ohms Municipal Box wiring can leave the building Remote Station Service NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems Intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit or a Remot
53. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 70 National Electrical Code U Underwriters Laboratories Documents L UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 217 Smoke Detectors Single and Multiple Station UL 228 Door Closers Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances UL 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired UL 2017 General Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems Other EIA 232E Serial Interface Standard EIA 485 Serial Interface Standard NEC Article 250 Grounding NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems Applicable Local and State Building Codes Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction LAHJ 00 CAN ULC 5524 01 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems Fire Lite Documents Fire Lite Device Compatibility Document 15384 SLC Wiring Manual Document 51309 ACS Series Annunciators Document 51480 CHG 120F Battery Charger Document 50888 CHG 75 Battery Charger Document 51315 LDM Series Lamp D
54. Power Screen 2 Power Screen 3 A real time display of the control panel voltages can be used to determine if a problem exists in the system Note that Power Screen 3 will only be displayed if the NACKEY NAC option card is installed in 7 8 of the main circuit board for Class B operation The following table lists the circuit being measured possible conditions and their respective voltage ranges Circuit Condition Voltage Range Normal Battery nominal 27 05 to 28 15 VDC Battery Low Battery 20 0 to 20 8 VDC No Battery 0 to 18 36 VDC 24V Resettable Normal 21 25 to 27 50 VDC 24V Nonresettable Normal 21 25 to 27 50 VDC Charger Normal 21 87 to 29 84 VDC Normal 1 3 to 1 6 VDC NAC I or NAC 2 Open Circuit 2 3 to 2 5 VDC Short Circuit 0 to 1 0 VDC 01 27 09 171 Operating Instructions 4 22 4 Trouble Reminder READ STATUS 1 TROUBLE REMINDER Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 2 will display the following screen Read Status Screen 2 TROUBLE REMINDER TROUBLE REM The screen indicates whether the Trouble Reminder feature 1s On or Off 4 22 5 Timers Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 2 will cause the following Timer screens to be displayed TIMERS PHS DELAY PRE SIGNAL WATERFLOW TIMERS HC LOSS DELAY These screens will indicate the delay time in seconds for each of the first three possible delay options The AC Loss Delay time is displayed in hours 172 MS 9200UDL
55. SETUP 2 SYSTEM SETUP S VERIFY LOOP Programming Screen 2 PROGRAMMING 1 HISTORY 2 WALK TEST S OPTION MODULES Programming Screen 3 PROGRAMMING 1 PASSWORD CHANGE 2 CLEHR PROGRAM S PROGRAM CHECK Programming Screen 4 01 27 09 63 Programming 3 6 1 Autoprogram Pressing while viewing Programming Screen 1 will select the Autoprogram option which prompts the control panel to poll all devices installed on the SLC loop The PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM 2 POINT PROGRAM S 70NE SETUP primary purpose of autoprogramming is to allow the installer a fast and easy way to bring the system on line as quickly as possible The first time the system is powered up it should be autoprogrammed Programming Screen 1 If the system is already programmed and Autoprogram is initiated the system will only add default values for newly installed devices When Autoprogram is selected the control panel will begin autoprogramming the system by communicating with each addressable device installed on the SLC loop While autoprogramming the panel will display the following HUTOPROGRAM HUTOPROGRAMMING PLEASE WHIT Autoprogram Progress Screen When Autoprogramming is completed the control panel will display the type and quantity of each device installed on the SLC loop similar to the following display OF DET LOOP1 55 OF MON LOOPI 855 F CON LOOP 838 Autoprogram Result Screen 1 I
56. Screen 4 EDIT DETECTOR iDa8i 1 ZHOUPM HD IECT IUE 2 DESCRIPTIGONM eee Edit Detector Screen 5 Enable Disable Detector EDIT DETECTOR To Enable or Disable the detector press the key while viewing the Edit Detector 1 ENABLED Screen 2 Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and 2 TYPE Enabled No If Enabled No is selected the detector will not be polled by the control S VERIFICATION panel preventing the detector from reporting alarms and troubles to the panel The Edit Detector Screen 2 control panel will display the device type and address which has been disabled and will turn on the Trouble LED and Disable LED 68 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming Type EDIT DETECTOR To select the type of detector being programmed press the 2 key while viewing the 1 ENABLED Edit Detector Screen 2 This will cause the control panel to display the following Z TY PE Detector Type Screens S VERIFICATION Edit Detector Screen 2 DETECTOR TYPE 1 Z5MOKE 2 USER DEF IHED 1 S SMOKE ION Detector Type Screen 1 Pressing the down arrow key will display additional detector types as indicated in the following table Photo w Heat Fire Alarm User Defined 9 same as previous Beam User Defined 4 same as previous Smoke DuctP User Defined 5 same as previous Photo w Heat While viewing either Detector Type screen select the type of detector being progr
57. Synchronization is a feature that controls the activation of notification appliances in such a way that all devices will turn on and off at exactly the same time This is particularly critical when activating strobes which must be synchronized to avoid random activation and a potential hazard to individuals Devices connected directly to the control panel s NACs can be synchronized as described in Type on page 106 Notification appliances connected to remote power sources may require synchronization with the FACP s devices This can be accomplished by connecting the Remote Synchronization Output from TB2 of the MS 9200UDLS to a compatible sync input of a power supply such as the FCPS 24FS6 8 The 24 VDC 40 mA signal from TB2 follows that is mimics the signal on NACI This allows the devices connected to the power supply to be synchronized with the devices connected to on the FACP The Remote Synchronization Output is power limited and supervised refer to UL Power limited Wiring Requirements on page 53 A 4 7 ELR resistor must be connected to the end of the wiring at the remote power supply Remote Power Supply Sync Input Remote Sync Output ELR FACP main circuit board O ita E REMOTE PWR 3 POWER POWER SUPPLY SYNC Figure 2 10 Remote Sync Output MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Installation 2 7 UL Power limited Wiring Requirements Power limited and nonpower limited circuit wiring
58. Troubles for addressable device addresses 1 10 Pressing while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 3 will select the Point or Zone range to be annunciated refer to the tables in ANN LED Zone Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module on page 124 and ANN LED Point Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module on page 126 Pressing 2 while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 3 will select either addressable detectors or addressable modules to be annunciated MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 123 Programming ANN LED Zone Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module If Zone is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms only the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the active alarm status of each zone in the Zone Range programmed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows ANN RLED Module 1 Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Battery Fault Fault Charger Fault Fault Disabled Maintenance 00 01 02 03 C 04 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Active Alarm Active
59. When the Acknowledge Step key is pressed and at least one new alarm or trouble exists in the system the acknowledge message is sent to the printer and history file If the trouble clears either before or after the Acknowledge Step key is pressed the clear trouble message is sent to the printer and history file If all troubles clear and there are no supervisory or fire conditions active in the system the system returns to normal mode operation and the System All Normal message is shown on the LCD display and sent to the history and printer files The auto restore feature will restore cleared troubles even if the troubles were never acknowledged Note that pressing the Alarm Silence key when only troubles exist in the system will have the same effect as pressing the Acknowledge Step key except the Alarm Silenced LED will light 4 5 Alarm Operation 160 Alarm operation is similar to trouble operation with the following differences e The piezo sounder produces a steady output as opposed to a pulsed output e Fire Alarm LED flashes 1 second On and 1 second Off The LCD displays Alarm along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date e Communicate the alarm to the Central Station e Alarms latch and are not allowed to clear automatically e Alarms activate software zones if so programmed e Timers for Silence Inhibit Autosilence and Trouble Reminder are started e Alarms activate t
60. _ Decor Presi oo o UDACT Ne Detector Zone Asien Uony Detector AdyNoun mom OmwadDACT No Module Programming Notmuled PrimerPC No ModueType Montor xam Yes SeweTemimiPan ID 000 Module Presi No Primary Phone Type Module Zone Assgn O00ony f Secondary Phone Type Module none DACT Communication OFF Zone 0 Enable Ened AC Loss Delay 2 Zone Enable Embid BackupReporing FistAvaldie _ Zom2Embie Embed Primary Reporting Siye Poin Zone 3 Enable Enabled Secondary Reporting Sye Poin Primary Account Code SCO Zone 96 Enable Enabled Secondary Account Code Q0 Zones 97 8 amp 9 mbi Primary 24 Hour Test Time 00 Www Seemay2iHowTetTime 0X0 ITESPEED Secondary Phone Number __ Trouble Reminder Off PrmayDACTFomat Ademco Conec ID Bamer Secondary DCT Format AdemcoComatID LTmeFoma Pe ANNEmbed No Hours Sening 12 ANNBUSModwesAddi S Nom Minutes Seting 00 ANSP Port SoiSe s O ANNSPGBad 980 AM PM Setting AM ANNSPGDaaBis 7 Month Seins 0 ANNSPGFamy __ vm __ Day Sewing 90
61. alarm and activates its programmed control outputs for four seconds if those outputs have been programmed for silenceable activation It also stores each alarm in the walktest history file which can be sent to an optional printer The stored display will be the same as if the device actually activated except the colon in the time stamp is replaced with an asterisk Note that if the system under test includes one or more enabled MMF 302 monitor modules the following may apply If the MMF 302 monitor module is used for a supervised 2 wire smoke zone alarming any monitor module in the system will result in the activation of pro grammed control outputs for an additional eight seconds or less This is caused by the temporary removal of 24 VDC resettable power from the MMF 302 The MMF 302 reports this loss of power as an open condition in addition to the alarm condition Open Condition Addressable devices are monitored for fault conditions during Walktest mode When a new trouble condition occurs the FACP will activate all and control modules programmed for Walktest and mapped to the faulty device then shut them off after eight seconds While in Walktest the trouble relay is activated and the system Trouble LED flashes as in all of the Program and status change operations The alarm relay is not activated MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 167 Operating Instructions 4 22 Read Status 168 Read Status functions do
62. alarm exists from a monitor module point that has a waterflow type code and its mapped NAC control module outputs are programmed for nonsilenceable operation the Alarm Silence key will not function Also any output zone activated by a waterflow device will not be silenceable if the Waterflow Silenceable option is set to NO in system programming 4 14 Detector Functions Maintenance Alert Each addressable detector is monitored by the control panel for its maintenance status If a detector is near but below the allowed alarm limit a maintenance alert message will automatically be displayed signaling that the detector 1s in need of servicing Automatic Test Operation An automatic test of an addressable detector is performed each minute resulting in a complete SLC loop test in approximately 5 hours if the loop has the maximum number of devices installed The detector s sensing chamber and electronics are functionally tested for normal safe operation A trouble message is displayed upon failure of this test A System Reset will clear this trouble Type Code Supervision The FACP monitors addressable hardware device codes at slow intervals Mismatch of any type code compared to the system program will cause a device trouble System Alarm Verification The control panel may be programmed to perform alarm verification to help eliminate the nuisance of false alarms Alarm verification applies to smoke detectors only Smoke Detector Data
63. are also compatible with older 300 Series devices If a mix of old and new series devices are installed on the same loop the FACP must be programmed to operate in CLIP mode Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable detectors 1 6 2 Intelligent Addressable Modules Newer Series The newer series of Control Modules and Monitor Modules provide an interface between the control panel and conventional notification and initiating devices Each module can be set to respond to an address with built in rotary switches The maximum address cannot exceed address 99 Note that a blinking LED on an addressable module piat indicates communication between the module and the control panel 20 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description These devices 1 MMF 300 MMF 301 MMF 302 CMF 300 CRF 300 can operate in CLIP mode Classic Loop Interface Protocol or LiteSpeed mode to provide a quicker response They are also compatible with older 300 series devices If a mix of old and new series devices are installed on the same loop the FACP must be programmed to operate in CLIP mode Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable modules Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for a list of approved conventional notification and initiating devices 1 6 3 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices Fire Lite s 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices are fully compatible with the MS 9200UD
64. can then press the keypad Up or Down arrow key to view the new subscreen To select one of the choices in a screen the programmer presses the keypad numerical key corresponding to the desired choice Note that subscreens may also have multiple options which require viewing more than one screen The same process as detailed in the previous paragraphs is followed to view all option choices 01 27 09 61 Programming 3 5 Programming and Passwords There are two factory set programming passwords which will access the Programming screens as indicated in the following examples From either of the screens access to specific system and device features or programming may be obtained user programming entries are stored in nonvolatile memory The factory set passwords can 6 be changed by the user as described in Password Change on page 143 If an invalid password is entered the blinking cursor will return to the first password character position To exit Programming or Read Status mode at any time press the ESC Escape key repeatedly Note that Programming mode must be exited using the ESC key in order to store the program data entered during this mode If the Reset key 15 pressed or power is lost before exiting Programming mode the data just entered will not be saved To access user Programming mode press the Enter or Mode key The LCD will display the following 1 REHD STATUS MODE 2 PROGRAMMING MODE S REMOTE DOWNLOAD To
65. columns of data on standard 9 x 11 tractor feed paper This section contains information on connecting a printer to the control panel and setting the printer options MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 31 Product Description 32 1 8 7 4 2 1 Connecting PRN 6F Printer Remote printers require a primary AC power source If required for the fire alarm system configuration for example a Proprietary Fire Alarm System a remote printer requires a secondary power source battery backup Since a secondary power source is not provided as a standard feature a separate UL listed Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS should be used The building emergency power supply may be used as long as it meets the power continuity requirements of NFPA 72 Refer to NFPA 72 for further details Connect the remote printer to the FACP via the ANN S PG module using a standard DB 25 cable One end of the cable will plug into the DB 25 connector on the PRN printer and the other end plugs into the parallel connector on the ANN S PG module Note that the 9 pin DB 9 port on the ANN S PG is used to connect a serial printer The 25 pin port is used for a Centronics parallel printer cable Connect either a serial or parallel printer but not both at the same time 1 8 7 4 2 2 Setting Printer Options Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN 6F printer for instructions on using the printer menu controls Set the printer options under the menu area as shown in the
66. deactivate when the FACP Alarm Silenced LED is illuminated 110 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming SYSTEM SETUP 3 6 5 7 Canadian Option 1 CANADIAN OPT OFF Pressing while viewing System Setup Screen 3 will allow the programmer to 2 SIL NO configure the system to automatically monitor addressable ionization smoke detector sensitivity using Canadian specifications The display will change to Canadian Opt On Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Canadian Opt On and Canadian Opt Off System Setup Screen 3 SYSTEM SETUP 1 CANADIAN OPT OFF 2 WAHTERFLOW SIL WO Relays Selection Screen 3 6 5 8 Waterflow Silenceable Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen 3 will allow the programmer to configure the system for silenceable on nonsilenceable waterflow circuits Each press of the 2 key will toggle the display between Waterflow Sil No and Waterflow Sil Yes When Waterflow Sil No is selected all output devices associated with a waterflow type input device will be nonsilenceable When Waterflow Sil Yes is selected all output devices associated with a waterflow type input device will be silenceable 3 6 6 Verify Loop Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 2 will select the Verify Loop option During loop verification the FACP polls each device on the SLC to determine if the PROGRAMMING 1 LOOP SETUP 2 5VSTEM SETUP 6 S VERIFY LOOP device is com
67. designed to provide early warning against fire they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire A fire alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning or simply may not function for a variety of reasons Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys in or behind walls on roofs or on the other side of closed doors Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building A second floor detector for example may not sense a first floor or basement fire Particles of combustion or smoke from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because e Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors walls or chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow e Smoke particles may become cold stratify and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located e Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets e Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector The amount of smoke present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density If such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of detectors the detectors will not go into alarm Smoke detectors even when working properly have sens ing limitations Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend
68. dress panel and the ground stud in the backbox An optional DP 9692 LED dress panel is available for use with the ANN LED annunciator module e me ey C ee e ee Ll m eee eee dp9200udls cdr eee e EH Fees Y 1 8 3 Trim Ring An optional Trim Ring P N TR CE is available for the FACP backbox The Trim Ring provides a finished appearance for a semi flush mounted panel 1 8 4 Battery Box BB 26 The BB 26 battery box may be used to house up to two 26 AH batteries and the CHG 75 Battery Charger The battery box which is red and is provided with knockouts was designed specifically to compliment mounting below the FACP BB 55F The BB 55F battery box may be used to house two 26 AH batteries two 60 AH batteries or one 100 AH battery When the CHG 120F is mounted in the BB 55F two 26 AH or one 60 AH battery may also be housed in the battery box MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Manual MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Product Description 1 8 5 Battery Charger 1 8 5 1 CHG 75 Battery Charger The CHG 75 is capable of charging up to 75 AH lead acid batteries with the MS 9200UDLS FACP The FACP battery charger must be disabled by removing jumper JP5 when using the CHG 75 The charger and up to 26 AH batteries can be housed in the BB 26 battery box Larger batteries and the charger can be housed
69. following table Font LPI ESC Character Bidirectional Copy CG TAB Country Auto CR Color Option Formien Lines Standard Table 1 2 PRN Setup Options Seng Opin Seng Graphic E US ASCII OFF Not Installed 6LPI 60 Exec 10 5 CPI Skip Emulate I O Buffer Serial Baud Format Protocol Character Set SLZero Auto LF PAPER BIN 1 BIN 2 SINGLE PUSH TRA PULL TRA PAP ROLL 10CPI 0 5 Epson FX 850 40K 9600 or 2400 7 Bit Even 1 Stop XON XOFF Standard On On 12 727 12 72 12727 12 72 12 72 12 72 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description 1 8 7 5 ANN I O LED Driver Module The ANN I O is an LED driver module that can be used in a wide variety of applications including as an interface with most customized graphic annunciators The ANN I O can drive up to 40 LEDs The module is provided with a plastic enclosure for mounting inside the annunciator or accessory box The following sections describe hardware installation Refer to the section titled ANN BUS Options on page 118 for programming information 1 8 7 5 1 ANN I O Board Layout Figure 1 7 illustrates the ANN I O board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP pin connectors for connecting LEDs and the DIP switch for selecting the ANN BUS ID number Terminals not used future
70. in the BB 55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control panel Refer to the CHG 75 Manual for additional information 1 8 5 2 CHG 120F Battery Charger The CHG 120F is capable of charging up to 120 AH lead acid batteries with the MS 9200UDLS FACP The FACP battery charger must be disabled by removing jumper JP5 when using the CHG 120F The batteries and charger can be housed in the BB 55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control panel Note that when using the BB 55F for housing the charger and batteries greater than 26AH multiple BB 55Fs are required Refer to the CHG 120F Manual for additional information 1 8 6 IPDACT Internet Protocol DACT The IPDACT is a compact Internet Protocol Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter designed to allow FACP status communication to a Central Station via the internet No telephone lines are required when using the IPDACT Using Contact ID protocol from the FACP the IPDACT converts the standard DACT phone communication to a protocol that can be transmitted and received via the internet It also checks connectivity between the FACP and Central Station Refer to the IPDACT Product Installation Document P N 53109 for additional information 01 27 09 23 Product Description 1 8 7 ANN BUS Annunciators Modules WARNING Disconnect all sources of power AC and DC before installing or removing any modules or wiring The legacy ACS annunciators may n
71. input assignments for 1 NAC2 NAC 3 and NAC 4 Note If the NACs have been configured for Class in the Setup option only NACI and 2 will display test information NAC 3 and NAC 4 will display asterisks and will not be included in the test MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 145 Programming Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the following ZONES NO INPUT B B9 16 11 1 001 The Zone No Input screen allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been programmed to at least one input device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an addressable module control module in this example with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any input devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without input assignments Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed ZONES NO OUTPUT B H9 18 11 10001 The Zone No Output feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been programmed to at least one output device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an addressable detector with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any outpu
72. module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel enabled V lt ADJ gt lt NOUNS represents the adjective and noun which have been programmed describing the location of the displayed device Control indicates that the selected module is a control module V Sor represents Silenceable S or Nonsilenceable W or represents Waterflow Timer Delay W Waterflow Timer Delay enabled 2 Waterflow Timer Delay disabled V ZNNN represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is assigned to NNN the three digit zone number from 000 099 V 1 002 represents the Loop Device type and Device address 1 SLC Loop M Module and 002 Module Address 02 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 85 Programming 86 EDIT CONTROL 1 ENABLED 2 5 5 Edit Control Screen 2 To change the programming for the displayed module press the keyboard down arrow key to view the following Edit Control screens EDIT CONTROL 1 ENABLED WES 2 TYPE CONTROL 5 5 YES Edit Control Screen 2 EDIT CONTROL li 1 uHLKTEST YES 2 Z0NE ASSIGNMENT BE Edit Control Screen 3 EDIT CONTROL 1 ZHOUPR HD ITECT IUE 2 DESCRIPTION a e e eed Edit Control Screen 4 Enable Disable Module To Enable or Disable the control module press the 7 key while viewing the Edit Control Scre
73. must remain separated in the cabinet power limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0 25 6 35 mm away from any nonpower limited circuit wiring and nonpower limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through different knockouts and or conduits A typical wiring diagram for the MS 9200UDLS is shown below Figure 2 11 Typical UL Power limited Wiring Requirements Power limited Circuits Class 2 Power limited Circuits Class 2 Nonpower limited Circuits Nonpower limited Circuits NI LN TELE TESE E E E BALE E g TESI pea ly o eani X L4 Power limited Circuits Class 2 att maintain minimum 0 25 between power limited and nonpower limited circuits wiring REMOVE TO DISABLE GND FLT JP7 L 30 perm ci SW1 jise id m NI PRI ACTIVE SEC ACTIVE 1 CEE DISPLAY Eee gt wu PRI INE uw Ry Os AC Power i X Ed 3 E O F Ground Strap Nonpower limited Grounding Stud Circuits O To Batteries E e e O 92udulpw cdr MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 1 01 27 09 53 Installation 2 8 Digital Communicator Network Service Provider s Facilities Telephone Two independent telephone lines can be connected to the control panel Telephone line control command is made possible via double line seizure as well as usage of an RJ31X style interconnection Note that it is critical tha
74. not assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condition When a detector triggers an alarm the onboard piezo sounds immediately but the NACs are prevented from activating for 15 seconds This inhibit time is factory set and cannot be changed Pressing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge Step key during the 15 second inhibit time will silence the piezo sounder and start a timer which prevents activation of NACs for an additional time duration which can be user programmed for up to three minutes After the programmed delay the NACS will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared Note that if a second alarm occurs during either time delay the alarm will be processed immediately causing activation of the appropriate output zones The events which occur upon PAS activation are as follows Y onboard piezo sounds immediately V control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point V control points programmed to Zone 97 will activate V ACS annunciators if enabled will pulse the Zone 97 PAS LED immediately upon PAS activation They will sound the local piezo and pulse the alarm associated zone and detector address point LEDs after 15 seconds of an unacknowledged PAS activation Note that if the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge Step button is pressed the annunciators will be inhibited from activating for an additional time delay v outputs NACS and control modules of associat
75. or temporarily disabled For added protection against telephone line failure backup radio transmis sion systems are recommended The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inadequate maintenance To keep the entire fire alarm system in excellent working order ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer s recommendations and UL and NFPA standards At a minimum the require ments of NFPA 72 shall be followed Environments with large amounts of dust dirt or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance A maintenance agreement should be arranged through the local manufacturer s representative Maintenance should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized professional fire alarm installers only Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept PrecauLarge PMD 02 26 2007 PrecauLarge PMD Installation Precautions WARNING Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel Disconnect all sources of power before servicing Control unit and asso ciated equipment may be damaged by removing and or inserting cards modules or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized Do not attempt to install service or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood CAUTION System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes To ensure proper system operation this product must be tested in accordanc
76. output device connected to the control module can be used to indicate a Pre signal condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre signal condition Attempting to do so will generate an error message and will be prevented by software checks Pressing 3 will cause the display to change to Two Stage 99 On Each press of the 5 key will cause the display to toggle between Two Stage 99 On and Two Stage 99 Off Refer to Two Stage Operation on page 108 for a description of this feature MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 93 Programming ZONE SETUP 3 6 3 4 Zones Installed 1 Z0NES INSTALLED Pressing for Zones Installed while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a 2 20NES ENABLED screen similar to the following S Z0NES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen 2 ONES INSTALLED HH Bl B2 BS H4 BS Zones Installed Screen This display will show all of the zones that have been programmed into the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones 3 6 3 5 Zones Enabled Pressing 2 for Zones Enabled while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to the following ONES ENABLED HH Bl 04 H5 Br HS iB 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Zones Enable
77. point or if the point is not yet tested The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through all untested points Pressing 3 for View Summary while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display a new screen which will show a total of the tested detectors tested modules untested detectors and untested modules for the current walktest session To end the Walktest session press the Escape key to return to the Walktest screen Pressing 3 for View Results while viewing the Walktest screen after a walktest session has been completed will allow the operator to view the final results of the most recent walktest 152 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 7 5 System To program the time and date into the control panel press 2 while viewing Maintenance Screen 2 The following display will appear SYSTEMS 1 TIMEADHTE System Screen Pressing while viewing the System Screen will cause the following screen to be displayed TIME AND DATE 1 TIME 81588 2 DHTE 61 61 2466 1 2HR Time and Date Screen To change the time press to display the following screen ENTER TIME Ah Time Screen A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display Enter the four digit number corresponding to the time 0000 1259 When the fourth digit is entered the cursor will move one position to the right Press for AM or 2 for PM to complete entering the time The display will return to the Time and
78. setting If no trouble exists at the panel other than AC Loss the System Trouble relay will delay its activation for the duration of the AC Loss Delay setting SYSTEM SETUP 3 6 5 5 NAC Notification Appliance Circuit PO ERS The options for the NACs on the control panel main circuit board can be configure by pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen 2 The following screens will be displayed 2 NAC 3 RELAY S System Setup Screen 2 NAC Selection Screen The Notification Appliance Circuits can be configured independently by pressing for NAC 1 2 for NAC 2 3 for NAC 3 or 4 for NAC 4 Note that 3 NAC 3 and 4 NAC 4 will be displayed and can be programmed regardless of how the NACKEY card is installed Their programming however will have no effect if the NACKEY card is installed for Class A operation 104 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming The following screens will be displayed for each selection 1 ENABLED WES 2 TYPE BELL 5 5 YES Screen 1 i AUTO SILENCE 2 CODING TEMPORAL NAC Screen 2 NAC 1 Z0NE BB HB BE BB 2 SIL INHIBITED NAC Screen 3 1 5 Screen 4 3 6 5 5 1 Enabled Pressing 7 while viewing NAC Screen 1 will cause the display to change to Enabled No This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from activating its devices Each press of the 7 key will
79. telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area 1 10 2 Digital Communicator Before connecting the control panel to the public switched telephone network the installation of two RJ31X jacks is necessary If trouble is experienced with this equip ment for repair or warranty information please contact Manufacturer FireeLite Alarms Inc One Fire Lite Place Northford CT 06472 203 484 7161 Product Model Number MS 9200UDLS FCC Registration Number US 1W6AL11B9200UDLS Ringer Equivalence 1 1B Note This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the inside of the FACP door is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company Alarm dialing equipment must be able to seize the telephone line and place a call in an emergency situation It must be able to do this even if other equipment telephone answering system computer modem etc already has the telephone line in use To do so alarm dialing equipment must be connected to a properly installed RJ31X jack that is electrically in series with and ahead of all other equipment attached to the same telephone line If there are any questions concerning these instructions consult the telephone company or a qualified installer about installing the RJ31X jack and alarm dialing equipment Refer to Digital
80. that the default password can be changed using the Password Change option refer to Password Change on page 143 Entering the correct password will cause the following screen to be displayed REMOTE DOWNLOAD 1 PROPRIETARY 2 HCCEPT DOWNLOAD Pressing for Proprietary No factory default setting while viewing the Remote Download screen will cause the display to toggle from Proprietary No to Proprietary Yes Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Proprietary No and Proprietary Yes Selecting Proprietary Yes will program the FACP to allow remote programming downloads from the PK Plus programming utility at all times without the need to access the Remote Download screen Pressing 2 for Accept Download will cause the following screen to be displayed FALLOWING DOWNLOADS IF YOU EXIT THIS SCREEN DOWNLOADS WILL BE DISABLED While this screen is displayed remote programming downloads are allowed regardless of the Proprietary setting Exiting this screen will disable any further downloads to the FACP Also following 30 minutes of inactivity including up downloading the Accept Download screen will time out causing the display to return to the System All Normal screen 6 2 Transferring a Program The first time that the control panel is downloaded whether initiated at the jobsite or remotely a secret code is loaded in by a Service Terminal Future upload or download requests cause verification of
81. the SLC loop and connected addressable devices Before executing any of the Clear commands listed above the control panel will provide a warning to the user by prompting with the following display WARNING SYSTEM CHANGE PROCEED 1 YES Pressing will cause the control panel to carry out the selected clear option Pressing 2 will prevent programming from being cleared 144 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 12 Program Check The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been 2 CLEBR PROGRAM programmed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not i PROGRAM CHECK been programmed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output correlations Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed PROGRAMMING 1 PASSWORD CHANGE Programming Screen 4 PROGRAM CHECK 1 NACS INPUT 2 Z0NES NO INPUT S 20NES OUTPUT PROGRAMCHECK 1 NACS NO INPUT Pressing while viewing the Program Check screen will display an NAC screen similar S 70NES NO INPUT to the following S Z0NES NO OUTPUT Program Check Screen NACS INPUT 1 25 51 44 55 6r The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zones 25 31 44 55 and 67 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without
82. the telephone lines Two optional 7 foot telephone cords are available for this purpose and can be purchased separately The control panel supervises both telephone lines for proper voltage A delay of two minutes will occur before a fault in either phone line connection is reported as a trouble When a fault is detected an audible trouble signal will sound the yellow trouble LED will blink the LCD display will indicate the phone line trouble and the trouble condition will be reported to the Central Station over the remaining operational phone line The control panel comes with line seizure capability provided for both the primary and secondary telephone line interfaces Any time that the control panel needs to make a call to a Central Station line seizure will disconnect any local premises phones sharing the same telephone line transmissions to the Central Stations will be sent over the primary phone line In the event of noisy phone lines transmissions will be sent over the backup secondary phone line Two phone numbers must be programmed the primary Central Station phone number and the secondary Central Station phone number system reports will be transmitted to the primary Central Station phone number Reports will automatically be sent to the secondary Central Station phone number if attempts to transmits to the primary Central Station phone number are unsuccessful If 10 total attempts to communicate are unsuccessful a Communic
83. to operate If the Strobe Sil Sync feature is selected Silence or Autosilence will turn off both audible and visual devices 106 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 4 3 6 5 5 4 Auto Silence 1 AUTO SILENCE The Auto Silence feature when enabled automatically silences all main circuit 2 CODING board silenceable notification appliances after a programmed length of time To TEMPORAL enable this feature and program the time delay before Auto Silence activation press I while viewing NAC Screen 2 The following screens will be displayed NAC Screen 2 AUTO SILENCE 1 ZNO 2 5 MINUTES 35 18 MINUTES Auto Silence Screen 1 HUTO SILENCE 1 15 MINUTES 2 26 MINUTES S 25 MINUTES Auto Silence Screen 2 HUTO SILENCE 1 36 MINUTES Auto Silence Screen 3 To disable the Auto Silence feature press for No while viewing Auto Silence Screen 1 To enable the Auto Silence feature press the number corresponding to the time delay which will elapse before Auto Silence activates This information will be stored in memory and the display will return to NAC Screen 2 Note All silenceable control modules as well as the remote power supply sync will be controlled by the Autosilence timer for NAC 1 3 6 5 5 5 Coding only for NACs not programmed as Sync Strobe Type The Coding feature allows the programmer to select the type of output that the main circuit board notification appliances will generate when activated
84. trouble condition if no alarm condition exists 4XTMF Transmitter Module Figure C 2 Remote Station Connection Using 4XTMF Module 200 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems MS 9200UDLS Addressable Fire Control Panel MS 9200UDLS Main Board Motor 5 CER EIS accus Form C Alarm contact programmed to See Mote 1 activate on General Alarm 7 Return Cu Feed Pj Form C Trouble contact which will 2 Qu 20 automatically activate on any Trouble Line Limited a Energy 150U0C condition Qi 0 1 amps max 26 HcCulloh Circuit Potter Electric Signal Company Transmitter Model EFT C used to transmit Alarm and Trouble Signals Form C relay contact programmed to activate on Supervisory condition Trouble Motor Speed Control 156 See Hote 1 n Notes TS Feed 1 Connection between the MS 9200UDLS and m s 20 the transmitter are supervised by the Central Office Line Limited transmitter Energy 150UDC ES 0 1 amps max cCulloh Circuit 2 This MS 9200UDLS Transmitter arrangement can be employed for NFPA T2 Potter Electric Signal Company Transmitter Model EFT C used to transmit Alarme and Trouble Signals Proprietary Protective Signaling System Figure C 3 Proprietary Protective Signaling System MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 201 NFPA Standard Spec
85. will cause the display to change to Pre signal 98 On Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre signal 98 On and Pre signal 98 Off When Zone 98 is programmed On a Pre signal activation of any device will cause Zone 98 to activate By assigning Zone 98 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an output device connected to the control module can be used to indicate a Pre signal condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre signal condition Pressing 3 will cause the display to change to Two Stage 99 On Each press of the 5 key will cause the display to toggle between Two Stage 99 On and Two Stage 99 Off Refer to Two Stage Operation on page 108 for a description of this feature 01 27 09 155 Operating Instructions SECTION 4 Operating Instructions 4 1 Panel Control Buttons 4 1 1 Acknowledge Step The first press of the Acknowledge Step key silences the piezo sounder changes flashing LEDs to steady and also changes the status field on the LCD display from capital letters to small letters When the piezo is silenced an acknowledge message is sent to the printer and the history file Acknowledge also sends a silence piezo command to the optional annunciators connected to the FACP When more than one event exists the first press of the Acknowledge Step key functions as described in the preceding paragraph Su
86. 00 m 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm using listed wire 6 000 1 800 m 12 AWG 0 75 mm 8 000 2 400 m 4 875 1 450 m 3 225 980 m 6 000 1 800 m Refer to ANN BUS Wiring on page 24 for information on device wiring EIA 232 connects to remote Twisted shielded pair 50 15 m 18 AWG 0 75 mm minimum power limited PC computer MMF 300 and MMF 301 power limited Initiating Device Circuit Maximum loop wire resistance 15 40 ohms for the MMF 300 and 20 ohms for the MMF 301 MMF 302 power limited Initiating Device Circuit No more than a 2 4 volt drop allowed at end of circuit Maximum loop wire resistance is 25 ohms CMF 300 power limited In alarm no more than a 1 2 volt drop allowed at end of circuit Notification Appliance Circuit Provides strobe and normal sync for remote NAC power supplies Remote Sync Output Untwisted unshielded pair wire Table Footnote 2 500 760 m 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm 2 500 760 m 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm Distance limitation set by 1 2 volt maximum line drop 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm Distance set by 295 ohm resistance limitation 12 18 AWG 3 25 0 75 mm 1 When using untwisted unshielded wire full conduit is recommended for optimum EMI RFI protection 206 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Wire Requirements E 1 NAC Wiring The following table lists NAC wiring requirements for the FACP Table E 2 NAC Wiring Re
87. 007 007 039 039 071 008 040 040 072 041 041 073 010 042 042 074 011 043 043 075 012 044 044 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 018 050 050 082 019 051 051 083 020 052 052 084 021 053 053 085 022 054 054 086 023 055 055 087 024 056 056 088 025 057 057 089 026 058 058 027 059 059 028 029 030 031 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 100 not used not used 215 Central Station Points 216 Table H 2 Addressable MODULES Module Module Module Module ut Address Bd Address Address Address MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 Index Numerics 24 Hour Test Time 137 300 Series addressable devices 21 4XTMF module 199 200 resistance 56 current 56 installation 56 installation steps 57 see also Transmitter Module 15 21 supervisory relay config 57 voltage 56 A AC Branch Circuit calculations 187 AC Loss Delay 104 AC Power 49 current 16 current maximum 49 voltage 16 wiring 16 49 Account Code 136 Acknowledge Step 18 156 ACM Series see also annunciator 41 ACM 16ATF Annunciator 41 ACM 32AF Annunciator 41 ACM SRF 15 contact rating 41 see also Relay Control Module 41 ACS 41 ACS LED annunciator 15 add Detector 65 add Module 75 addressable 14 addressable detectors see also detectors 15 Addressable Device Accessories 21 addressable modules 20 see also modules 15 addressi
88. 1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Product Description 1 8 7 6 4 ANN LED Connection to FACP Figure 1 10 illustrates the ANN LED board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN BUS ID number O Jehano o v gt N ANN BUS O AB j O TB1 O ANN LED ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited 24 VDC 01 27 09 ANN BUS ACS BUS EISE 24V 24V AB Q NON RST RST POWER POWER MS 9200UDLS Figure 1 11 ANN LED Connection to FACP 37 Product Description 1 8 7 7 ANN RLY Annunciator Module The ANN RLY relay module provides 10 programmable Form C relays when used with a compatible FACP 1 8 7 7 1 ANN RLY Board Layout Figure 1 10 illustrates the ANN RLY board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN BUS ID number ANN BUS ID a Address DIP switch ANN BUS Connector Figure 1 12 ANN RLY Board Layout 1 8 7 7 2 Specifications e Operating Voltage 24 VDC e Max Current V Alarm 75 mA V Standby 15 mA e Operating Temperature 32 to 120 0 C to 49 C e For indoor use in a dry location only 1 8 7 7 3 Mounting Installation The
89. 1 WALK TEST 2 PAS S PRE SIGNAL Edit Detector Screen 3 See Page PAS The PAS Positive Alarm Sequence option will program the detector to delay panel activation including alarm relay and communicator for a period of 15 seconds plus a programmable time of up to 3 minutes Zone 97 however will activate immediately and may be used to connect a signaling device to indicate PAS activation do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose To enable the PAS feature press 2 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen 3 until the display reads PAS Yes Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between PAS Yes and PAS No Referto Positive Alarm Sequence on page 165 For example if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for PAS operation V Select PAS Yes when editing the detector set to address 005 V Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this detector in this example Z001 V Program an output such as a control module that is to be activated by detector 005 by assigning the same zone to it in this example Z001 v Program an output such as a control module for PAS activation by assigning zone Z97 to it This control module may be connected to a signaling device used to indicate a PAS condition do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose V Enable zones 7001 and Special Purpose Zone PAS 97 and set the PAS delay timer to some value With the preceding pr
90. 156 E earth ground 49 edit MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Index control module 85 detector 66 detector screens 67 module monitor 76 EIA 232 58 for PC Printer connection 17 see also Printer PC interface 15 EIA 485 for ACS annunciators 17 for LCD 80F 17 Enable 92 Enable Disable control module 86 detector 68 module monitor 79 End of Line Resistor Assembly 21 Enter key 62 Erase History 112 Error Checking 186 event code classification 211 event codes 138 exiting programming 61 62 Read Status 61 62 F FACP see also Fire Alarm Control Panel 14 Features 14 Fire Alarm Control Panel see also FACP 14 Form C relay 19 41 50 G general alarm zone 81 see also zone ZOO 71 ground fault 58 H Hazard Condition 162 History 112 erase 112 Maintenance Level 149 view events 112 History file 15 HVAC Control 208 HVAC OVRRIDE 209 HVAC RESTART 208 HVAC SHUTDN 208 I Indicators 18 Installation 45 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 intelligent 14 Internet Protocol DACT 23 Inventory 14 INVREP 179 IPDACT 23 K Key Panel 18 function keys 18 service program keys 18 keyboard and keypad 59 Keypad Display removal and installation 55 L lamp test 18 LCD display 15 18 LCD 80F annunciator 15 41 LDM Series annunciator 41 LDM 32 Graphic Annunciator 15 LED AC Power 157 Alarm Silenced 157 Battery 157 Disabled 157 Fire Alarm 157 Ground 157 Kiss off 157 Maintenance 157 Primary Line Active 157 Secondary Line Active 157 see als
91. 190 NFPA Standard 198 nonpower limited relay connections 50 Nonresettable Power 19 current 16 49 nonsilenceable waterflow 95 111 Normal 158 normal display 60 Notification Appliance Circuit 16 104 see also NAC 14 50 Noun list 73 monitor module 83 multiple entries 74 Noun Adjective 71 73 control module 88 monitor module 81 Operating Instructions 156 Operation alarm 160 disable enable 163 hazard condition 162 medical alert 162 NAC 162 normal 158 process monitor 162 programmed zone 163 supervisory 161 trouble 158 waterflow 163 Option Modules 21 55 115 annunciators UDACT 115 Printer PC 142 Options 14 Output Circuits 19 P PAS 70 93 165 see also Positive Alarm Sequence 15 70 PAS BYPASS 165 PAS timer 102 Password 15 62 change 143 Maintenance Level 2 62 147 Master Level 1 62 PC personal computer MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Index ground fault 58 Phone Line 2 supervision 141 Phone Number 137 Piezo see also sounder 18 PK CD Programming Utility 22 point assignments 215 Point Program 65 Positive Alarm Sequence 70 165 see also PAS 15 power NAC 14 nonresettable 16 resettable smoke 16 system 14 power supply calculations 187 power limited relay connections 50 Power up first time 61 Pre signal 15 70 93 function 164 selection 81 Pre signal Delay timer 103 Pre signal timer 102 Primary Phone 131 primary power see also AC Power 49 printer baud rate 142 configuration 58 connection 57 gro
92. 2 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select 7 or 6 Data Bits MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 129 Programming 130 Pressing 3 for Parity while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 2 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select between No Parity Even Parity or Odd Parity Pressing for Stop Bits while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 3 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select between 0 or 2 0 Stop Bits 3 6 9 1 3 5 ANN 80 Options Pressing 2 while viewing ANN BUS screen 2 will display the following screen HhHhH 88H OPTIONS 1 PFIEZ U ENABLE 2 LOCk ENABLE S HCK BIN ENABLE ANN 80 Options Screen 1 HhHhH 88B OPTIONS 1 SIL BIN ENABLE 2 RST BIN ENABLE S BRL BIN ENABLE ANN 80 Options Screen 2 The Piezo Enable option allows the programmer to select whether the piezo sounder on any installed ANN 80 module will ever sound Pressing while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 1 causes the display to toggle between Piezo Enable Yes and Piezo Enable No The Lock Enable option allows the programmer to select whether or not any installed ANN 80 annunciator must be unlocked by its key before any annunciator key presses will function Pressing 2 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 1 causes the display to toggle between Lock Enable Yes annunciator must be unlocked for keys to function and Lock Enable No lock position is ignored The Acknowledge Button Enable A
93. 33 or 3 to select Rotary dialing with a make break ratio of 62 38 01 27 09 131 Programming 3 6 9 2 3 Secondary Phone ON BOARD DACT Press 3 while viewing On Board DACT Screen 1 to program the type of secondary 1 EHRBLED phone line being connected to the DACT The following screen will be displayed 2 PRIMARY PHONE S SECONDARY PHONE On Board DACT Screen 1 OM BOARD DACT SECONDARY PHONE LINE 1 TYPE TOUCHTONE Secondary Phone Line Screen To select the type press while viewing the Secondary Phone Line screen The following screen will be displayed PHONE LINE 1 TOUCHTONE 2 ROTHRY 6f 733 S ROTHRY 62 735 Secondary Phone Type Screen Press to select Touchtone dialing 2 to select Rotary dialing with a make break ratio of 67 33 or 3 to select Rotary dialing with a make break ratio of 62 38 3 6 9 2 4 Service Terminal The FACP can be programmed remotely from a PC using a modem and telephone S CENTROL STATION line Information can also be retrieved from the FACP using the same method The 3 SUPERU PHONE LINE Upload Download option allows an operator to set the necessary parameters to allow the uploading and downloading of data between the FACP and PC The Service Terminal selection provides the means for entering these parameters ON BOARD DACT 1 SERVICE TERMINAL On Board DACT Screen 2 Pressing 7 while viewing On Board Screen 2 will cause the following screen to appear SERVICE TERMINAL 1 RI
94. 4 zone type 95 list 95 Zone Z97 70 Zone Z98 pre signal zone 71 Zones 170 191 see also software zones 14 Zones Disabled 94 Zones Enabled 94 Zones Installed 94 zones per device 71 223 Notes 224 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Notes MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 225 Notes 226 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Limited Warranty Honeywell International Inc warrants products manufactured by it to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for eighteen 18 months from the date of manufacture under normal use and service Products are date stamped at time of manufacture The sole and exclusive obligation of Honeywell International Inc is to repair or replace at its option free of charge for parts and labor any part that is defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service All returns for credit are subject to inspection and testing at the factory before actual determination is made to allow credit Honeywell International Inc does not warrant products not manufactured by it but assigns to the purchaser any warranty extended by the manufacturer of such products This warranty is void if the product is altered or repaired by anyone other than Honeywell International Inc or as expressly authorized by Honeywell International Inc in writing or is serviced by anyone other than Honeywell International Inc or its authorized distributors This warranty is also void if there is a failure to maintain
95. 485 ACS or ANN BUS TB9 ACS ANN BUS annunciator connector Terminal 1 A and Terminal 2 B 1 2 1 Current Availability The following figure illustrates the maximum current that is possible for each panel circuit and the total current available from the FACP with optional second transformer TB1 0 30 amps max per circuit Standby 0 6 amp max per panel 0 30 amps max per circuit 2 5 amps max per circuit Note If NACs are configured as two Style Z Class A circuits each TB3 2 5 amps max Alarm per circuit 6 amps max 6 0 amps with optional second XRM 24B E transformer 3 0 amps max with only standard transformer installed TB4 circuit can handle 2 5 2 5 amps max per circuit amps maximum 2 5 amps max per circuit powerdist9200ud cdr Figure 1 1 Current Availability 01 27 09 17 Product Description 1 3 Controls and Indicators LCD Display The FACP uses an 80 character HONEYWELL 4 lines X 20 characters high LIFE SAFETY viewing angle LCD display The display includes a long life LED sii rtu 1 DE backlight that remains illuminated If AC power is lost and the system is not in alarm the LED backlight will turn off to conserve batteries LED Indicators LED indicators are provided to annunciate the following conditions AC Power green Fire Alarm red e Supervisory yellow Trouble yellow e
96. 5 adapter Make certain that the DB25 adapter does not swap the Transmit and Receive lines Apply power to the FACP and printer or PC Note that a ground fault zero impedance to ground may occur on the FACP dependent on the printer or PC being used due to this connection For this reason it is important that there be no preexisting ground fault on the panel Note that the printer may or may not be supervised as determined by user programming Refer to Printer PC on page 142 PRT PK CABLE 92udlstb8 cdr Figure 2 17 Serial Printer and Computer Connections Printer Configuration Refer to the documentation supplied with the printer for pertinent information about printer setup Set the printer s options as listed in the following table MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming SECTION 3 Programming NOTICE TO USERS INSTALLERS AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES This product incorporates field programmable software In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems UL 864 certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below Program feature Permitted in F Settings permitted UL 864 Y N in UL 864 Refer to Trouble Call Limit Dialer Runaway Preven Hon Trouble Call Limit Trouble Call Limi
97. 69 system power 14 System Setup 97 T Telephone Circuitry 42 Telephone Company Rights and Warnings 43 telephone line 54 Terminal 133 Test Time Interval 136 137 Time and Date Maintenance Level 153 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Index Time setting 100 Time Date setting 97 100 Time out 186 Timers 97 Transformer Assembly 20 Transmittal Priorities 182 Transmitter Module 56 see also 4X TMF module 21 Trouble 158 trouble display 159 trouble relay 14 Trouble Reminder 97 166 172 trouble responses 159 Two Stage 93 155 two stage operation 108 lype control module 87 detector 69 monitor module 79 NAC 106 type code control module 87 supervision 163 verification 15 U UL power limited wiring requirements 53 see also power limited and nonpower lim ited 50 Upload Download 184 V Verification detector 69 Verify Loops 111 View Events 112 voltage measurements 171 ranges 171 W Walktest 15 69 88 113 audible 113 Maintenance Level 151 operation 167 selection 81 silent 113 waterflow nonsilenceable 95 111 silenceable 95 111 Waterflow Delay timer 102 103 Waterflow Retard Timer 166 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Waterflow Silenceable 97 Wire Requirements 205 wiring AC Power 49 earth ground 49 NAC Style Y 51 NAC Style Z 52 wiring Style 14 X XRM 24 see Transformer Z Z00 71 81 Z97 PAS zone 70 Z98 71 Zone 97 93 Zone 98 93 Zone Assignment 71 81 109 control module 88 Zone Setup 92 Maintenance Level 15
98. 700 for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that 15 to be assigned to this device The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone Z00 When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the Edit Detector Screen 4 Note that the left and right Qf arrow keys can be used to navigate through the zones and the CLEAR key can be See Page used to quickly clear a zone Noun Adjective EDIT DETECTOR The Noun Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors 1 NOUN ADIECTIVE about the detector currently being programmed Pressing while viewing Edit 2 DESCRIPTION Detector Screen 5 will cause the following screen to be displayed deese e e e e e e e e e e bee Edit Detector Screen 5 1 STHHDHED ADJECTIVE 2 STANDARD NOUN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Noun Adjective Screen MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 71 Programming 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 STANDARD NOUN Pressing while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following screen s to be displayed Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed 3 CUSTOM ADJECTIVE to see all the Adjective screens Press the number corresponding to the adjective 4 CUSTOM NOUN that is to be u
99. 750 E1 01 27 09 189 Power Supply Calculations 7 4 Calculating the Battery Size Use Table 7 4 to calculate the total Standby and Alarm load in ampere hours AH This total load determines the battery size in AH required to support the control panel under the loss of AC power Complete Table 7 4 as follows Enter the totals from Table 7 3 on page 189 Calculation Columns 2 and 3 where shown 2 Enter the NFPA Standby and Alarm times refer to NFPA Requirements below 3 Calculate the ampere hours for Standby and Alarm then sum the Standby and Alarm ampere hours 4 Multiply the sum by the derating factor of 1 2 to calculate the proper battery size in AH 5 Write the ampere hour requirements on the Protected Premises label located inside the cabinet door Table 7 4 Total Secondary Power Requirements at 24 VDC Secondary Standby Load Required Standby Time total from Table 7 3 Calculation 24 hours Column 3 x Primary Alarm Load Required Alarm Time total from Table 7 3 Calculation for 5 min enter 0 084 Column 2 for 10 min enter 0 168 X 7 4 1 NFPA Battery Requirements NFPA 72 Local Proprietary Central Auxiliary and Remote Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm 7 4 2 Selecting and Locating Batteries Select batteries that meet or exceed the total ampere hours calculated in Table 7 4 The control panel can charge batteries
100. AC S RELAY S System Setup Screen 2 RELAYS 1 RELAY 1 2 RELAY 2 S RELHY 3 Relays Selection Screen To program Relay 1 or Relay 3 press the number corresponding to the selected relay Note that Relay 2 is fixed as a Trouble relay Selecting Relay 2 will have no effect on its programming The following screen will appear for each relay to be programmed RELAY 1 TYPE Relay Type Screen Pressing for Type while viewing the Relay Screen will cause the following screens to be displayed RELAY RELAY 1 ALARM 1 PROCESS MON AR 2 SUPERVISOR Y 2 HC LOSS S SUPERVISORY S HHZHRED Relay Screen 1 Relay Screen 3 RELAY RELAY 1 T ROUBLE 1 ZHEDICHL 2 COMM FAIL 2 SILENCEABLE ALARN 5 PROCESS MON Relay Screen 2 Relay Screen 4 While viewing the selected screen press the number corresponding to the desired relay type to program the main circuit board relay The choice will be stored in memory and the display will return to the Relay Type Screen which will show the programmed type choice Press the Escape key to return to the Relays Selection Screen and repeat the preceding procedure for the remaining relays Notes 1 AR AutoResettable in SUPERVISORY AR and PROCMON AR means that a relay with the Supervisory and or Process Monitor type code when activated will automatically reset when the corresponding condition is cleared 2 Arelay programmed with the Silenceable Alarm type will activate upon any alarm and
101. ACP activity to the central station press while viewing Central Station Screen 1 so the display reads Reporting Enabled Each press of the key will toggle the display between Reporting Disabled and Reporting Enabled MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 133 Programming 134 3 6 9 2 5 2 Backup Reporting The DACT can be programmed to transmit reports to primary and or secondary central station phone numbers as a backup Press 2 while viewing Central Station Screen 1 to display the following screen BHCKUP REPORTING 1 BACKUP ONLY 2 FIRST AVAILABLE Backup Reporting Screen Press to have all reports transmitted to the central station secondary phone number as a backup only if the primary phone line fails Press 2 to send reports to the first available phone number 3 6 9 2 6 Trouble Call Limit Dialer Runaway Prevention The Call Limit option limits the number of DACT trouble calls to the Central Station to a programmed amount between 0 and 99 for each unique trouble within a 24 hour period Separate limit counters keep track of each unique type of trouble Note that the number of phone line communication faults called to the Central Station are not limited by this feature No subsequent restoral message is sent to the Central Station s for a particular trouble whose call limit has been reached Local DACT annunciation will still track the particular trouble and restoral To set the Trouble Call Limit press 3 while viewi
102. Addressable Devices Twisted shielded pair 40 ohms maximum per length of Style 6 and 7 loops 40 ohms per branch maximum for Style 4 loops CLIP MODE Twisted unshielded pair 40 ohms maximum per length of Style 6 and 7 loops 40 ohms per branch LITESPEED maximum for Style 4 loops MODE Untwisted unshielded pair ACS BUS EIA 485 power limited ANN BUS EIA 485 power limited Connects to annunciator modules Twisted pair with a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms Connects to annunciator modules Twisted pair Wire Type and Limitations Recommended Max Distance Feet meters Wire Gauge and Compatible Brands 10 000 3 000 m 12 AWG 3 25 mm Genesis 4410 Signal 98230 Belden 9583 WPW999 14 AWG 2 00 mm Genesis 4408 amp 4608 Signal 98430 Belden 9581 WPW995 16 AWG 1 30 mm Genesis 4406 amp 4606 Signal 98630 Belden 9575 WPW99 Direct Burial Cable Isotec NP713110VNQ S 18 AWG 0 75 mm Genesis 4402 amp 4602 Signal 98300 Belden 9574 WPW975 Direct Burial Cable Isotec NP714110VNQ S 8 000 2 400 m 4 875 1 450 m 3 225 980 m 10 000 3 000 m 12 AWG 3 25 mm Belden 5020UL amp 6020UL Genesis WG 4315 amp WG 4515 14 AWG 2 00 mm Belden 5120UL amp 6120UL Genesis WG 4313 amp WG 4513 16 AWG 1 30 mm Belden 5220UL amp 6220UL Genesis WG 4311 amp WG 4511 18 AWG 0 75 mm Belden 5320UL amp 6320UL Genesis WG 4306 amp WG 4506 3 000 9
103. CK BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Ack Step button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored Pressing 3 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 1 causes the display to toggle between Ack Bin Enable Yes Ack Step button functions normally and Ack Btn Enable No Ack Step button never functions The Silence Button Enable SJL BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Silence button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored Pressing while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 2 causes the display to toggle between Sil Btn Enable Yes Silence button functions normally and Si Btn Enable No Silence button never functions The Reset Button Enable RST BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Reset button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored Pressing 2 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 2 causes the display to toggle between Rst Btn Enable Yes Reset button functions normally and Rst Btn Enable No Reset button never functions MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 OPTION MODULES 1 ANNUNCTATORS 2 0N BORHRD DACT S PRINTER PC Option Module Screen MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming The Drill Button Enable DRL BTN ENABLE option allows the programmer to select whether the Drill button on any installed ANN 80 annunciator will function norm
104. DC 01 27 09 49 Installation 2 4 Relays The FACP provides two programmable Form C relays and one fixed fail safe Form C trouble relay all with contacts rated for 2 0 amps 30 VDC resistive or 0 5 amps 9 30 VAC resistive Note that relay connections may be power limited or nonpower limited provided that 0 25 spacing is maintained between conductors of power limited and nonpower limited circuits Refer to UL Power limited wiring requirements Note that the programmable relay labeled as Relay 1 is factory default programmed as Alarm and programmable Relay 3 is factory default programmed as Supervisory The relay labeled Relay 2 is fixed as a Trouble relay and cannot be changed It is a fail safe relay which will transfer on any trouble or total power failure TB6 RELAY 2 TBS RELAY 1 TB7 RELAY 3 NO NC C 000 92udreyp cdr Relay contacts shown with power applied to panel and no active troubles alarms or supervisories Figure 2 6 Relay Terminals 2 5 Notification Appliance Circuits 50 eo See Page Manual The control panel provides four Style Y Class B or two Style Z Class A NACs Notification Appliance Circuits Each circuit is capable of 2 5 amps of current Total current in alarm for all external devices cannot exceed 6 0 amps refer to Calculating the System Current Draw on page 188 Use UL listed 24 VDC notification appliances only Circuits are
105. Date Screen displaying the new time To change the date press 2 while viewing the Time and Date Screen The following screen will be displayed EHTER DHTE SS MONTH DAY YEAR 01 01 2006 Date Screen A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display Enter the two digit month two digit day and four digit year The cursor will move one position to the right after each entry When the fourth digit of the year has been entered the display will return to the Time and Date Screen which will show the new date MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 153 Programming 3 7 6 Zone Setup PROGRAMMING Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen 2 will display the following screen 1 WALE TEST 2 S STEM S 20NE SETUP Maintenance Screen 2 ONE SETUP 1 ENABLE 2 DISHBLE S Z0NE 97 Zone Setup Screen Pressing while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen ONE ENABLE Enable Screen A flashing cursor appears to the right of the Z To enable a zone enter the two digit zone number 00 99 After the second digit is entered the zone will be enabled and the cursor will return to the original position The next zone to be enabled can then be entered Press Esc Escape to return to the previous screen Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen ONE TO DISABLE Y Disable Screen A flashing cursor appears to the right o
106. E S REMOTE DOWNLOAD Pressing while this screen is being displayed will cause the control panel to enter the Read Status Mode which allows the user to view the programmed features and status of the control panel The Read Status feature is not password protected Refer to Read Status on page 168 for a detailed description of this feature Pressing 2 will select user Programming Mode which may only be accomplished by an authorized person After pressing 2 a screen will prompt for a password After entering the correct password the user may select from a list of programming options Pressing 3 will select Remote Download which allows the user to enable the remote programming option Refer to Remote Site Upload Download on page 184 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming Exit Programming Read Status The programmer can exit any mode by repeatedly pressing the keypad ESC Escape key until the display reads System All Normal Note that the data which is entered during Programming mode is not saved until the programmer exits this mode by repeatedly pressing the ESC key If the Reset key is pressed or power is lost before exiting Programming mode all data just entered will be lost User Programming Levels There are two user programming levels e User Master Program Level 1 is used for programming panel specific data relating to device types zoning messages control panel functions etc User Maintenance Program
107. ECTOR 2 MOBDULE The operator selects the type of device which is to be viewed by pressing for Detector or 2 for Module If is pressed the display will change to the following screen READ SYSTEM POINT ENTER DETECTOR Entering the three digit detector address will cause the control panel to display the current status of the selected device For example if a detector with address 001 on the SLC loop is entered a display similar to the following will appear NORMAL SMOKE PHOTO gt NORTH CLASSROOM 2485 10001 The information in the preceding display includes NORMAL the present status could also be ALARM TROUBL DISABL etc SMOKE PHOTO the device type which is a photoelectric smoke detector could also be ION for ionization smoke detector NORTH CLASSROOM the Adjective Noun label for this device e 7005 the first of five possible assigned software zones e D001 I SLC Loop D Detector 001 Address 001 e V Alarm Verification Enabled V Yes No e S Silenceable for control modules S Yes No e W Walktestable for control and monitor modules W Yes No MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 169 Operating Instructions Pressing the down arrow key while viewing the screen shown above will allow the operator to view additional programming information about the selected device such as e Enable Disable Status Device Type Alarm Verification On Off for detectors
108. ED 2 Z0NES ENABLED S Z0NES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen 2 ONE SETUP 1 20HE TYPES 2 Z0NES AVAILABLE S Z0NE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 ZONE SETUP 3 6 3 1 Enable EHRBLE Pressing for Enable while viewing Zone Setup Screen 1 will display the following screen 2 DISABLE S 20NE 97 9S 99 Zone Setup Screen 1 ONE TO ENABLE W Enable Screen This screens allows the programmer to enable zones one at a time A flashing cursor appears next to the Z prompting the programmer to enter a two digit zone number 01 99 When the second digit is entered the zone will be enabled and the cursor returns to the original position next to the Z Another zone can then be enabled 92 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming ZONE SETUP 3 6 3 2 Disable 1 ENABLE Pressing 2 for Disable while viewing Zone Setup Screen 1 displays the following 2 DISABLE S 2Z0NE 97 98 99 Zone Setup Screen 1 ZONE TO DISABLE X Disable Screen This screen allows the programmer to disable zones one at a time A flashing cursor appears next to the Z prompting the programmer to enter a two digit zone number 01 99 When the second digit is entered the zone will be disabled and the cursor will return to the original position next to the Z Another zone can then be disabled 3 6 3 3 Zone 97 98 and 99 Pressing 3 for Zone 97 98 and 99 while viewing Zone Setup Screen 1 will display the following screen
109. EF IHED 1 S WATERFLOW Monitor Type Screen 1 Pressing the down arrow key will display additional Monitor Type screens While viewing one of the Monitor Type screens select the type of monitor module being programmed by pressing the corresponding keypad number key The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen 2 which will show the new type selection Table 3 1 on page 80 lists the Monitor Types and their respective functions 01 27 09 79 Programming Monitor module type selection will affect the function of the point as follows Table 3 1 Monitor Types Supervisory AR Supervisory nonlatching tracking HVAC OVRRIDE Switch Supervisory nonlatching tracking Process Monitor AR 3 Piezo nonlatching tracking Sil Switch Acts like panel Silence Key Reset Switch Acts like panel Reset Key Drill Switch Acts like panel Drill Key PAS Bypass PAS Disable HVAC RESTART Switch see note 2 Drill Switch AR Acts like panel Drill Key nonlatching tracking Note 1 For entries ending in AR AR refers to AutoResettable 2 For HVAC RESTART and HVAC OVRRIDE descriptions refer to Monitor Module Operation on page 208 3 Combination systems employing these non fire monitor types require the SLC loop to be programmed by the installer for Style 4 operation and isolator modules must be employed on each non fire branch of the SLC as per Figure 13 in the SLC Wiring Manual document number 51309 Fire and non fire devic
110. EVENTS NORTH CLASSROOM WALK TEST LOG 441 IBFISH 8125065 LMA If there are no events in the current walktest session the first screen will be displayed indicating no events have been stored in the walktest log If any events have been stored a screen similar to the second will be displayed indicating the latest event As walktest events occur the display will change to indicate the latest event stored events can be scrolled on the screen by pressing the up or down arrow keys To return to the first event press the st Event key Pressing 2 for View Points while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display one of the following screens UNTESTED POINTS 8168 HO POINTS 10001 SMOKE cCPHOTO SYSTEM e e e ede HOT TESTED If the system has no points installed the first screen will be displayed If points are installed the second screen will be displayed which allows the viewing of all untested system points and their status relating to the current walktest session The up and down arrow keys will allow viewing of all untested points If a point is tested while it is being displayed the screen will update and display the next untested point The first line indicates the total number of untested points The second line displays information about an untested point A description on the bottom of the screen will indicate if the displayed point has been disabled if the Walktest option has been disabled for that
111. F Transmitter Module on page 199 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System MS 9200UDLS Alarm Trouble and Supervisory contacts connected to Transmitter s See Figure C 3 Proprietary Protective Signaling System on page 201 for installation instructions for this unit MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System All connections are power limited and supervised This application is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory or trouble conditions Notes 1 3 ohms maximum loop resistance allowed for wiring from control panel to Municipal Box 2 Cut JP3 on the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board to supervise placement of 4XTMF module and circuit 3 Cut JP2 on the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board to enable FACP Supervisory relay 4 Referto AXTMF Transmitter Module Installation on page 56 for detailed information Figure C 1 Municipal Box Connected to F Transmitter Module Municipal Box Circuit Gamewell Model M34 56 Local Energy Municipal Box Polarities shown in alarm condition m Nonpower limited ooooooQ Figure C 1 Municipal Box Connected to 4AXTMF Transmitter Module MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 199 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System Notes 1 Cut Jumper JP3 on the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board to supervise placement of the 4X TMF module 2 Referto 4XTMEF Transmitter
112. Interval Account Code 24 Hour Test Time Phone Number Communication Format e Event Codes 4 22 13 Service Terminal READ STATUS 1 SERUICE TERMINAL Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 5 will display the following screens 2 PRINTER PC S PRINT Read Status Screen 5 SERVICE TERMINAL RING COUNT Service Terminal Screen The Panel ID number is displayed as the first item in Service Terminal Screen 1 To view the phone number for each Service Terminal press 2 for Terminal or 3 for Terminal 2 while viewing Service Terminal Screen 1 The Ring Count is displayed in Service Terminal Screen 2 4 22 14 Printer PC Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 5 will display the following screen PRINTER PC PRINTER PC FRASHH Printer PC Screen The display will inform the operator as to whether the control panel is configured for a printer or a PC In the example above PR4800 indicates that the panel is configured for a printer with a baud rate of 4 800 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 177 Operating Instructions 4 22 15 Print To print program data or control panel status press 5 while viewing Read Status Screen 2 PRINTER PC 5 The following screens will be displayed S PRINT READ STATUS 1 FUTURE USE Read Status Screen 5 PR I HT 1 HISTORY 2 WHLKTEST LOG S DETECTOR DATA Print Screen 1 PRINT 1I EAIT PRINTING Print Screen 2 Pressing while viewing Prin
113. J31X Jack Note Shorting bars inside RJ31X Jack removed during male plug insertion DS 7 foot a Cable Secondary MCBL 7 a Line ordered separately Modular Female Figure 2 13 Wiring Phone Jacks MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Primary Phone Line PH 1 01 27 09 Installation 2 9 Optional Module Installation WARNING Disconnect all sources of power AC and DC before installing or removing any modules or wiring MS 9200UDLS Keypad Display Removal Removal of the keypad display is normally not necessary If however it becomes necessary to replace the keypad display or access jumpers JP5 and JP7 or switch SW1 the Keypad Display can be removed by inserting a Phillips screwdriver into each of the three holes located in the flexible covering of the Keypad Display and loosening the three mounting screws Note that it is not necessary to disconnect the cables between the Keypad Display and the main circuit board unless the unit itself is being replaced Carefully lift the Keypad Display and rest the unit at the bottom of the main circuit 5 92000 5 PN 52750 E1 board Mounting Screw Access Hole O TB TB2 TES TBA TB5 NC NC C TB8 IN IN OUT OUT TB9 acs TB10 5 yd Be rs AB Q PT UD 0000 PPP UT UD CLILLL Q er REMOTE PWR TEN 3B 3B Fe 28 48 4B 3 POWER POWER SUPPLY SYNC NAC 1 CLASSA NAC 2 CLASS A NAC 1 amp 3 CLASSB
114. LS FACP The address of 300 Series devices cannot be set above 99 Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable devices 1 6 4 Addressable Device Accessories End of Line Resistor Assembly The End of Line resistors are included with each module Refer to the specific module documentation for specific information Power Supervision Relay The UL listed End of Line power supervision relay is used to supervise the power to 4 wire smoke detectors and notification appliances EOL C R W Mounting Plate The EOL CR red and EOL CW white are single End of Line resistor plates which are required for use in Canada An ELR which is supplied with each module and fire alarm control panel is mounted to the EOL C R W plate Resistors mounted to the plate can be used for the supervision of a monitor and control module circuit 1 7 Optional Modules The MS 9200UDLS main circuit board includes option module connectors for the following module 4XTMF Transmitter Module The 4XTMF provides a supervised output for local energy municipal box transmitter alarm and trouble reverse polarity It includes a disable switch and disable trouble LED A jumper on the module is used to select an option which allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists The module plugs into connectors J5 and J6 which are located near the right edge the main circuit board When the 4X TMF module
115. LS system Do not use a mix of ACS annunciators and ANN annunciators since they use different communication protocols ACS or ANN annunciators use the same TB9 terminal block connection To install any of these devices press the number corresponding to the desired device shown in the Annunciator Screen 3 6 9 1 1 Term Options While viewing the Annunciators screen each press of the 7 key for Term Enabled will cause the display to toggle between Term Enabled No and Term Enabled Yes Notes 1 The LCD 80F is a Terminal Mode annunciator To enable the MS 9200UDLS for LCD 80F operation press 7 for Term Enabled Yes 2 The Terminal Mode annunciator LCD 80F and the Printer PC use the same TB8 terminal block on the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board Only one device can be connected at one time therefore enabling an annunciator in the Term Option will disable any Printer PC communications MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 115 Programming 3 6 9 1 2 ACS Options ANNUNCIATORS Pressing 2 for ACS Options while viewing the Annunciators screen will display the 1 TERM ENABLED following screen 2 ACS OPTIONS S ANN BUS OPTIONS ACS OPTIONS 1 HCS ENABLED 2 HCS INSTALLED Pressing while viewing the ACS Options screen will cause the display to toggle between ACS Enabled Yes and ACS Enabled No To install an ACS annunciator the display must read ACS Enabled Yes If ACS has been enabled press 2 while viewing the Annunciator Screen to
116. Level 2 is used by a qualified operator to access features such as Disable Enable View and Clear History Walktest and System Time Change 3 3 Initial Power up The following sections describe the initial programming procedures for a new system The same procedures are used to modify programming in an existing system After completing the wiring of addressable devices to the SLC apply power to the control panel If the addressable devices have not yet been programmed into the FACP their LEDs will not flash and the following trouble message will be displayed TROUBL IN SYSTEM HO DEVICES INSTALLED 812166 3 4 Programming Screens Description eo See Page MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 The options available when the Enter key is pressed are Read Status Programming The Read Status and Programming options have multiple functions or features which may be chosen To view all of the choices it is necessary that the programmer scroll through a number of additional subscreens These selections are displayed on multiple screens to make them more readable for the programmer Refer to Master Programming Level on page 63 for additional information on the various screens The title of the main option screen will always be displayed at the top of the subscreens for the programmer s convenience If additional subscreens exist an Up or Down arrow will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen being viewed The programmer
117. Module 0 200 amps ANN R LED Annunciator Module 0 068 amps ANN RLY Relay Module 0 075 amps Note Total worst case current draw on a single ANN BUS cannot exceed 0 5 amp If current draw exceeds 0 5 amps refer to Powering ANN BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply on page 27 24 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description After calculating the total worst case current draw Table 1 1 specifies the maximum distance the modules can be located from the FACP on a single wire run The table ensures 6 0 volts of line drop maximum In general the wire length is limited by resistance but for heavier wire gauges capacitance is the limiting factor These cases are marked in the chart with an asterisk Maximum length can never be more than 6 000 feet 1 800 m regardless of gauge used The formula used to generate this chart is shown in the note below Wiring Distance ANN BUS Modules to FACP Total Worst Case 22 Gauge 18 Gauge 16 Gauge 14 Gauge Current Draw amps 0 100 1 852 ft 4 688 ft 6 000 ft 6 000 ft 0 200 026 ft 2 344 ft 3 73 ft 5 906 ft 0 300 617 ft 1 563 ft 2 488 ft 3 937 ft 0 400 463 ft 1 172 ft 1 866 ft 2 053 Tt 0 500 370 ft 038 ft 1 493 ft 2 362 ft Table 1 1 Wiring Distances Note The following formulas were used to generate the wire distance chart 6 0 Volts Total Worst Case Current Draw amps Maximum Resistance Ohms Maximum Wire Length feet Maximum Resistance Ohms
118. NG COUNT Service Terminal Screen 132 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 9 2 4 1 Ring Count SERVICE TERMINAL The ring count designates the number of rings allowed on the phone line prior to 1 RING COUNT answering an incoming call from a service terminal The factory default is 0 which means the control panel will not answer an incoming call This entry may be programmed for to 25 rings Service Terminal Screen 2 To change the Ring Count press while viewing the Service Terminal Screen 2 The following screen will be displayed RING COUNT RANGE 8 25 RANGE Ring Count Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display Enter the two digit ring count which can be a value between 00 and 25 After the second digit is entered the display will return to the Service Terminal screen 3 6 9 2 5 Central Station Central Station programming configures the control panel DACT for contacting the central station Pressing 2 while viewing On Board DACT Screen 2 will cause the ON BOARD DACT 1 SERVICE TERMINAL 2 CENTRAL STATION x SUPERU PHONE LINE following screens to be displayed On Board DACT Screen 2 CENTRAL STATION 1 REPORTING DISABLED 2 REPORT BACKUP S CALL LIMIT Central Station Screen 1 CENTRAL STATION 1 ZPRIMBRES 2 SECONDHRY S REPORT STYLE Central Station Screen 2 3 6 9 2 5 1 Reporting Enable To enable the for reporting F
119. NGE 6 96 SECONDS X Waterflow Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display Enter a delay time consisting of two digits such as 25 for twenty five seconds Upon entering the second digit the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 1 01 27 09 103 Programming TIMEF 3 6 5 4 4 AC Loss Delay i AC LOSS DELAY The reporting of a loss of AC power to a central station can be delayed by programming the length of the desired delay The factory default setting is 2 hours Press while viewing Timer Screen 2 to display the following Timer Screen 2 HC LOSS DELAY 1 NO DELAY 2 ENTER DELAY AC Loss Delay Screen 1 Pressing while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen 1 will program the FACP to transmit an AC Loss report immediately to the central station Pressing 2 while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen 1 will display the following HC LOSS DELAY RANGE 8 25 SS SS AC Loss Delay Screen 2 A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display Type the two digit AC loss reporting delay in hours 00 to 23 hour delay When the second digit is entered the display will return to AC Loss Delay Screen 1 Note Upon the loss of AC power at the control panel relays programmed for AC Loss will transfer immediately regardless of the AC Loss Delay
120. NN I O Address Screen 3 will select the Point or Zone range to be annunciated refer to the tables in ANN I O Zone Option on page 121 and ANN I O Point Option on page 122 Pressing 2 while viewing ANN I O Address Screen 3 will select either addressable detectors or addressable modules to be annunciated 120 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming ANN I O Zone Option If Zone is selected as the module option the first ten LEDs on the first ANN I O module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and 40 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the active alarm status of each zone in the Zone Range programmed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN I O module will be as follows Module LED Zone Range 0 29 Zone Range 30 69 Zone Range 70 99 Fire Alarm Supervisor Zone e Battery Fauli S Charger Fault Zow37 Zone 77 9 NAC Fault Zone 38 10 Disabled Zone Zone 00 oe Zone 80 Zone Sj Zone 82 Zone 83 Zone 4 Zone 85 Zone Zone 7 19 Zone 08 Zone 89 Zone 90 Zone 91 Zone 92 Zone 93 Zone 94 Zone 95 3 Zmi Zone Zee Zone 9 2 Zone Zone 99 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 335 A Nor Used 30 Zone 29 Zone Noted MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 121 Programming 122 ANN I O Po
121. PE M 109 RED cR REUS RR RENS 110 C anadrdm ODLEO ode uo issu d 111 MOTerrtosv STC Ce AU oa celer qu 111 EOOD TT 111 FAS O cite 112 bal CNS asa enc 112 Erase abire m UU E 112 bus mm Er 113 Option Modulos ird defit onde dus Los Na a too sci este AL 115 ALOU S meii Ecosse cibus a 115 RP TET 115 INC SO MED RR 116 ZUNNSBUS ODLOPS debt 118 COnbosmd DNO Dee icai rtu Db 131 Onboard DACT ENaDIG PP S 131 Prima yee Io MN T T TO E 131 BEC ONG To P SUE ERROR ER I D EE 132 Service TC UII NA Arts tee rco p dose 132 re ucl 133 Trouble Call Limit Dialer Runaway Prevention 134 SUPEI Se E olm 141 PIV p Cep o S 142 Password C NANTE 143 Clear FOS ADIs ot 144
122. Point 78 Point 79 Point 80 Point 81 Point 82 Point 83 Point 84 Point 85 Point 86 Point 87 Point 88 Point 89 Point 90 Point 91 Point 92 Point 93 Point 94 Point 95 Point 96 Point 97 Point 98 Point 99 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 5 Ro a8 01 27 09 Programming PROGRAMMING ANN LED Options ee eee Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN BUS Address Screen when the ANN LED option is selected will display the following screen 2 ANN LED OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 3 ANN LED ADDR 4 LOOP1 DET 1 18 ALARM SUFERU TBL ANN LED Address Screen 1 HHH LED ADDR 1 1 ZPOIHT ZOHE 2 HLARM ATS ANN LED Address Screen 2 ANN LED ADDR 1 1 RANGE Z DET MOD 35 LO0F ANN LED Address Screen 3 The first screen indicates that the ANN LED at the selected ANN BUS address is programmed to annunciate Alarms Supervisories and Troubles for SLC Loop 1 addressable Detectors with addresses through 10 The programming can be changed using ANN LED Address Screens 2 and 3 Pressing while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate either Point addressable device address information or Zone information Pressing 2 while viewing ANN LED Address Screen 2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate only Alarms for addressable device addresses 1 30 or Alarms Supervisories and
123. Pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen 2 will cause the following displays to appear CODING 1 STEADY 2 MARCH TIME S CALIFORNIA Coding Screen 1 CODING 1 TEMPORAL 2 TWO STAGE 3 MIN S TWO STAGE 5 MIN Coding Screen 2 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 107 Programming 108 The programmer can select the notification appliance output by pressing the number corresponding to the desired output The coding selections are Steady a continuous output with no coding March Time 120 ppm pulse per minute output California 10 seconds on and 5 seconds off Temporal 1 2 second on second off second on 2 second off l second on 1 second off Two Stage refer to Two Stage Operation on page 108 for a description Selection of one of the above options will cause the control panel to store the information in memory and return the display to NAC Screen 2 which will display the new coding choice 3 6 5 5 5 1 Two Stage Operation Two Stage operation consists of the following e Ist stage output 20 ppm pulse per minute coding e 2nd stage output Temporal coding as described above If Two Stage operation is programmed as the Coding option the following sequence of events will occur during an alarm 1 The on board NACs which are programmed to General Alarm Zone will activate with a Ist stage output upon activation of any alarm point 2 Ifthe activated alarm point is directly mapped to a zone w
124. Qualifier where 1 New Event and 3 New Restore XYZ Event code GG Group number Zone Point number Notes 1 18 which is used in the reporting structure to identify the transmission as Contact ID is not printed out in the alarm and trouble report 2 GG Group Number is fixed at 00 and cannot be changed 3 CCC for Zone or Point Number V Zone Number is transmitted as 01 for zone 1 up to 99 for zone 99 V Point Number is transmitted as 01 for point address 1 up to 99 for point address 99 2 Ademco Contact ID Typical Printout A typical printout from a Central Station receiver such as the Ademco 685 of alarm and trouble reports in the Ademco Contact ID Reporting Structure follows Time Date Rcvr Line ID SSSS QXYZ GG CCCC 11 28 03 25 11 7777 110 00 C001 general fire alarm on zone one 11 28 03 25 11 E111 00 C002 smoke detector alarm on zone two 11 28 03 25 11 7777 E380 00 C003 fault on zone three 11 28 03 25 11 TITI E570 00 C009 Zone nine disabled 11 28 03 25 11 TITI R110 00 C001 Zone one alarm restored 11 28 03 25 11 TITI R111 00 C002 smoke detector zone two restored 11 28 03 25 11 TITTI R380 00 C003 zone three fault restored 11 28 03 25 11 TI R570 00 C009 zone nine reenabled 11 28 03 25 11 7777 E158 00 C006 high temperature zone six 11 28 03 25 11 7777 E151 00 C007 gas detected zone seven Notes 1 111s an example of a Receiver Line Card showing which receiver and li
125. RST RST POWER POWER AB MS 9200UDLS Figure 1 3 FACP wiring to ANN BUS Device 26 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Product Description 1 8 7 1 3 Powering ANN BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply Figure 1 4 illustrates the powering of ANN BUS devices from an auxiliary power supply such as the FCPS 24FS6 8 when the total ANN BUS power requirements exceed the panel s DC Power Output capability TB2 H Cut Ground Fault Detection jumper JP1 FACP monitors for ground faults N N COM CI AN ANA TBS i996 D 3 2 1 ANN BUS and power wiring are supervised and power limited 424 VDC nonresettable vA 4 ANN BUS ACS BUS mmm r1 A O 92udlstofcptoann cdr WC TB1 TB9 TB10sLc SIC SLC SLC SHIELD IT LLL 0 s 24 241 O O NON RST RST POWER POWER FCPS 24FS6 8 MS 9200UDLS Figure 1 4 Powering ANN BUS Devices from FCPS 24FS6 8 1 8 7 2 ANN BUS Device Addressing Each ANN BUS device requires a unique address ID Number in order to communicate with the FACP A 5 position DIP switch on each device is used to set this address The address set for these devices must also be programmed at the FACP for the specific device refer to the programming section titled ANN BUS Options on page 118 A maximum of 8 devices can be connected to the ANN BUS communication circuit Device addresses do not need to be sequential and can b
126. Recall function The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter by letter If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0 9 the number is incremented by one If the last character is a letter it changes to a 0 If the last character is 9 it goes to 0 The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming As an example the user could quickly enter 3 ROOM 305 as follows 1 The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field Press the zero key twice to display FLR 3 2 With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field press the zero key twice to recall the display ROOM 304 The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field 3 With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305 4 Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field 5 Select a zone number from 00 to 99 700 default zone is the general alarm zone Z01 through 799 may be selected to link software zones 3 6 2 2 Module Programming Pressing 2 while viewing Point Program Screen 2 will allow the programmer to POINT PROGRAM SELECT add delete or change the programming of an addressable module The following 1 DETECTOR screen will be displayed by the control panel 2 MODULE Po
127. S PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions 4 22 6 NAC Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen 2 will display the following screen Note that 3 NAC 3 and 4 NAC 4 will always be displayed regardless of how the NACKEY NAC option card is installed The operator can press to view the programmed options for 1 2 to view the programmed options for NAC 2 3 to view the programmed options for NAC 3 or 4 to view the programmed options for NAC 4 The resulting screens will display the following information Enable Disable Status Circuit Type Bell Strobe etc Silenceable Nonsilenceable Auto Silence Enable Disable and time delay in minutes Coding Selection Temporal Steady etc Zone Assignments Silence Inhibit Enabled Disabled Synchronization Type System Sensor Wheelock or Gentex 4 22 7 Relays READ STATUS 1 RELAYS 2 PROGRAM CHECK S HISTORY Read Status Screen 3 Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 3 will display the following screen RELAY 1 RELHY 1 2 RELHV 2 S RELAY 3 The operator can view the programmed option for each relay by pressing the corresponding number key MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 173 Operating Instructions 4 22 8 Program Check Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen 3 will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed PROGRAM CHECK 1 HHCS NO INPUT 2 Z0NES NO INPUT S Z0NES NO OUTPUT Pressing while viewing the Program
128. Screen 1 TEST TIME INTERVAL 1 6 HOURS Test Time Interval Screen 2 The test report sent to the Central Station phone number may be sent once every 6 8 12 or 24 hours Select the desired Test Time Interval by pressing the corresponding digit in the screens shown above Account Code Pressing 2 while viewing Primary Secondary Screen 1 will cause the following screen to be displayed ACCOUNT CODE 4 CHAR RANGE amp F Account Codes Screen The Account Code which is assigned by a Central Station depends on the communication format being used The Account Code screen will have a flashing cursor in the lower left corner Enter the supplied account code using 0 9 and A F keys 136 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 24 Hour Test Time CENTRAL STATION Pressing 3 while viewing Primary Secondary Screen 1 will cause the following 1 TEST TIME INT screen to be displayed 2 ACCOUNT CODE S 24HR TST TIME Primary Secondary Screen 1 zd TEST T I RANGE 008 2559 24 Hour Test Time Screen Use the 24 Hour Test Time screen to program the time that the DACT will transmit the 24 Hour Test to the Central Station A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the screen Enter a four digit number representing the test time using military time 0000 midnight and 2359 11 59PM Phone Number CENTRAL STATION 1 PHONE NUMBER Pressing while viewing Primary Secondary Screen 2 w
129. Smoke detector data is monitored by the FACP eliminating the need to test the sensitivity of each detector at its location printout of each detector s data can be retrieved from the FACP using an optional printer or Windows HyperTerminal Detector sensing ability can decrease with age and should be monitored as part of a system s routine maintenance 4 15 Time Functions Real Time Clock MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 The MS 9200UDLS includes a crystal based clock that provides time of day date and day of week Time is displayed as 12 or 24 hour time with month day year and is stored in RAM Daylight savings time change over is programmable and automatic If both AC and battery are lost the time must be reset 01 27 09 163 Operating Instructions 4 16 Synchronized NAC Operation Synchronization is a panel feature that controls the activation of notification appliances in such a way that all devices will turn on and off at exactly the same time This is particularly critical when activating strobes which must be synchronized to avoid random activation and a potential hazard or confusion The FACP can be programmed to operate with a variety of manufacturer s devices NAC synchronization can only be supported properly by the Remote Power Supply Sync Terminal which follows NAC 1 programming Important When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual devices is programmed for silenceable and the synchronization
130. US communication format The devices are powered via two additional wires from either the host FACP or remote UL listed filtered power supply The function buttons keyswitch and piezo sounder may be individually enabled and disabled through the FACP software Refer to ANN 80 Options on page 130 for a description of this feature and programming information Note that if the keyswitch is enabled and remains in the unlocked position for more than two minutes without any buttons being pressed on the annunciator a trouble indication will be annunciated 1 8 7 3 1 Specifications e Operating Voltage Range 18 VDC to 28 VDC e Current Consumption 24 VDC nominal filtered and nonresettable V Normal Standby no activity 37 0 mA V Trouble 39 0 mA V Alarm 40 0 mA V AC Fail not backlit 15 0 mA e For use indoors in a dry location 1 8 7 3 2 Installation Ensure that all power AC and DC has been removed from the FACP before installing the annunciator 1 8 7 3 3 Mounting The ANN 80 can be surface or semi flush mounted to a single double or 4 square electrical box Select and remove the appropriate knockout s pull the necessary wires through the knockouts and mount the annunciator in or on the wall depending on the type of installation desired The ANN 80 cover must be attached to the annunciator backplate before mounting the annunciator to the electrical box wall The cover cannot be reattached or removed after the ann
131. acters 2 A and B Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the QZ key four times until a blank appears in the desired position When all characters have been entered press the Enter key to store the information The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen 4 displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen Recall Increment Function In addition the user may use the Recall Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows If the zero key is pressed a 0 is placed in the first letter position If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions the entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed and the cursor moves to the last character of the field Recall function The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter by letter If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0 9 the number is incremented by one If the last character is a letter it changes to a 0 If the last character is 9 it goes to 0 The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming As an example the user could quickly enter 3 ROOM 305 as foll
132. ally or always be ignored Pressing 3 while viewing the ANN 80 Options Screen 2 causes the display to toggle between Drl Btn Enable Yes Drill button functions normally and Drl Btn Enable No Drill button never functions 3 6 9 2 Onboard DACT The Onboard DACT Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter provides communication to a central station Pressing 2 while viewing the Option Module Screen will cause the following screens to be displayed ON BOARD DACT 1 ENABLED WES 2 PRIMARY PHONE S SECONDARY PHONE On Board DACT Screen 1 ON BOARD DACT 1 5 TERMINAL 2 CENTRAL STATION 3 SUPERU PHONE LINE On Board Screen 2 3 6 9 2 1 Onboard DACT Enable To enable the onboard DACT press while viewing Onboard DACT Screen 1 until the display reads Enabled Yes The display will toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No with each press of the key 3 6 9 2 2 Primary Phone Press 2 while viewing On Board DACT Screen 1 to program the type of primary phone line being connected to the DACT The following screen will be displayed BOHRE DACT PRIMARY PHONE LINE 1 TYPE TOUCHTONE Primary Phone Line Screen To select the type press while viewing the Primary Phone Line screen The following screen will be displayed PHONE LINE 1 TOUCHTONE 2 ROTHRY 6f733 S ROTHRY 62 735 Primary Phone Type Screen Press to select Touchtone dialing 2 to select Rotary dialing with a make break ratio of 67
133. amage the alarm system crippling its ability to report a fire Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently con sumed drugs alcohol or medication Please note that e Strobes can under certain circumstances cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy e Studies have shown that certain people even when they hear a fire alarm signal do not respond or com prehend the meaning of the signal It is the property owner s responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals n rare instances the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical power If AC power fails the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service
134. ammed by pressing the corresponding keyboard number key The display will return to Edit Detector Screen 2 and indicate the selection next to the Type option Note If a detector is selected to be aSUPERV DUCTP type it will function like a supervisory point not a fire alarm point The supervisory LED and supervisory relay will activate not the fire alarm LED or alarm relay if the detector senses smoke Verification Alarm verification is used to confirm that a smoke detector activation is a true alarm condition and not a false alarm This feature is selected by pressing 3 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen 2 so that the display reads Verification On Each time the 3 key is pressed the display will toggle between Verification On and Verification Qf Off For a detailed description refer to Alarm Verification None or One Minute See Pag on page 166 Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the EDIT DETECTOR necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation To 1 URLKTEST enable a device for the Walktest feature press while viewing the Edit Detector c Screen 3 until the display reads Walktest Yes Each press of the key will cause Ene the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No Refer to Walktest on Edit Detector Screen 3 page 167 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 69 Programming 70 See Page EDIT DETECTOR
135. an be connected to this panel Disconnect all sources of power before servicing The panel and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and or inserting cards modules or interconnecting cables while this unit is energized 2 3 1 AC Power and Earth Ground Connection Primary power required for the FACP is 120 VAC 60 Hz 3 0 amps for the MS 9200UDLS or 240 LETEFIEITTETETITI VAC 50 Hz 1 5 amps for the MS 9200UDLSE Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code S S ns NEC and or local codes Use 14 AWG 2 00 HOT NEUT EARTH 605 mm or larger wire with 600 volt insulation rating Make certain that the AC mains circuit breaker is off before wiring any connections between the mains and the control panel Connect wiring from the AC mains to TB11 on the FACP being careful to observe proper connections Connect a wire from the grounding stud in the cabinet to a known solid earth ground in the building Refer to Figure 2 1 on page 45 for location of the stud This connection 15 vital for maintaining the control panel s immunity to unwanted transients generated by lightning and electrostatic discharge Apply AC power to the panel only after the system is completely installed and visually checked Note that AC power must be applied to the panel before installing the battery interconnect cable refer to the following section 2 3 2 Battery Power Ax em Cabl Before
136. and Serial Port for printer connection Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Port PAR parallel and Port SER serial It is important to note that the interface selected determines which options are available to the user If the Parallel Port option is selected the user has the option to supervise the printer and select an offline timer for the supervision by pressing 2 for Printer Supervision while viewing Print Options screen 1 Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Printer Supv NO for no supervision and Printer Supv YES for printer supervision Note that this option is not selectable if the Serial Port option has been selected If the Parallel Port option is selected the user has the ability to select an Offline Timer by pressing 5 while viewing Print Options screen 1 The resultant screen allows the programmer to program the Offline Timer for a delay of between 0 and 255 seconds before loss of printer supervision is reported as a trouble If the Serial Port option is selected the Printer Supv and Offline Timer options will not be available The Baud Rate Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits options are only available when the Serial Port option has been selected Pressing for Baud Rate while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 2 will cause a screen to appear which allow the user to select a Baud Rate of 79200 9600 or 2400 Pressing 2 for Data Bits while viewing ANN S PG Options screen
137. arger 23 see also remote battery charger 16 Clasic Loop Interface Protocol 97 Class A 50 Class B 50 NAC wiring 51 CLIP mode see also Classic Loop Interface Protocol 97 Clock Format 101 Coded Operation 164 Coding NAC 107 coding two stage operation 108 communications format 138 Control Buttons 156 control module 20 description display 91 display 85 edit 85 enable disable 86 noun 90 noun adjective 88 89 silenceable 88 type 87 type codes 87 Correlations 191 current AC Power 49 availability 17 maximum 17 Current Draw Calculations 189 D DACT enable 131 onboard 131 data 218 Index see also detector data and sensitivity 163 Data Entry via computer keyboard 59 via keypad 59 data values see also detector data and sensitivity 15 Date setting 101 Daylight Savings Time 101 DC power nonresettable 49 resettable 49 see also auxiliary DC power 49 Default Programming 197 Delete Detector 66 Delete Module 76 Description control module 91 detector label 74 monitor module 84 Detector add 65 adding description 71 delete 66 edit 66 enable disable 68 screen display 67 type 69 verification 69 detector data 163 178 179 acceptable range 178 printout 178 Detector Programming 65 device addressing 97 Digital Communicator 42 dimensions cabinet 47 DIRTY1 179 DIRTY2 179 Disable 93 Disable Point Maintenance Level 148 Downloading 185 dress panel 20 22 drift compensation 15 179 definition 179 Drill 18
138. ator Failure report will be displayed Note that as an option all reports may also be sent to the secondary Central Station phone number The MS 9200UDLS meets NFPA 72 National Fire Code reporting requirements for a the type of signal b condition and c location of the reporting premises The general priority reporting structure 15 1 Zone Alarms and Restores 2 Zone Troubles and Restores 3 System Troubles and Restores 4 24 hour Test MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 181 Central Station Communications 5 1 Transmittal Priorities The integral communicator transmits highest priority events first Events in terms of priority are listed below in descending order 1 Alarms highest priority level Pull stations V Waterflow V Smoke detector V Other alarm types 2 Supervisory Zone 3 System Troubles V Zone disabled V Fire drill V AC fail after delay V Zonal faults V Earth fault V Low battery V Telephone line fault V Notification Appliance Circuits fault V Communication trouble Y Annunciator trouble V System off normal 4 Restoral Reports V Zone alarm V Supervisory V Zone s enabled Fire drill V AC V Zone fault V Earth V Battery V Telephone line V Notification Appliance Circuits V Communication V Annunciator trouble V System off normal 5 24 Hour Test lowest priority Red LEDs are provided on the circuit board to identify which telephone line is activated Also a green LED labeled Kissoff
139. atus information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the alarm trouble and supervisory status for each of the ten zones in the Zone Range programmed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows ANN LED Module 1 Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Battery Fault Fault Charger Fault Fault Disabled Maintenance EA 00 E icol 01 PME 02 ell 03 04 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 00 Zone 01 Zone 02 Zone 03 Zone 04 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 00 Zone 01 Zone 02 Zone 13 Zone 04 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 05 Zone 06 Zone 07 Zone 08 Zone 09 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory ANN LED Module 2 Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Zone 15 Zo
140. ause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at their own expense 02 26 2007 Adherence to the following will aid in problem free installation with long term reliability Like all solid state electronic devices this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interferences proper grounding will reduce susceptibility Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes Consult with the Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards Failure to do so can damage circuits Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling filing reaming or punching of the enclosure When possible make all cable entries from the sides or rear Before making modifications verify that they will not interfere with battery transformer and printed circuit board lo
141. ause the following screen to be displayed SUPERUISE PHONE LINE 1 PHONE LINE 2 YES Panel ID Screen Each press of the key while viewing this screen will toggle the option between Supervise Phone Line 2 Yes and No MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 141 Programming 3 6 9 3 Printer PC OPTION MODULES A Printer or a PC can be connected to the control panel Pressing 3 while viewing 1 BHHUHCIRTORSAUDRCT the Option Module Screen will cause the following screen to appear 2 0M BOARD DACT 3 FRIHTER PC Option Module Screen F E I E F 1 PRINTER SU Z2 PRIHTER SU YES S PC Printer PC Screen Pressing while viewing the Printer PC Screen will program the control panel for an unsupervised NO SU printer The display will change to the Printer Baud Rate Screen as shown below Pressing 2 while viewing the Printer PC Screen will program the control panel for a supervised SU printer Printer supervision when enabled will typically detect the removal of the printer cable and will detect when the printer power has been turned off Depending upon the brand of printer other errors such as paper empty or printer off line may be detected The following screen will appear which allows the programmer to select the baud rate for the printer communication PRINTER BAUD RATE 1 724488 BAUD 2 4608 BHUD 35 9688 BAUD Printer Baud Rate Screen Pressing the number key corresponding to the des
142. ble relay 325 Reversing 326 Bell 3 327 Bell 4 ALARM 24 Hr Non Burg ALARM Gas Detected ALARM Refrigeration ALARM Heating System ALARM Water Leakage ALARM Foil Break ALARM Day Zone ALARM Low Gas Level ALARM High Temperature ALARM Low Temperature ALARM Air Flow SUPER Fire Supervisory SUPER Low Water Pressure SUPER Low CO2 SUPER Gate Valve SUPER Low Water Level SUPER Pump Activation SUPER Pump Failure TROUBLE System Trouble TROUBLE AC Power TROUBLE System Low Battery TROUBLE RAM Checksum restore not applicable TROUBLE ROM Checksum restore not applicable TROUBLE System Reset restore not applicable TROUBLE Prog Change restore not applicable TROUBLE Self Test Failure TROUBLE System Shutdown TROUBLE Battery Test Failure TROUBLE Ground Fault TROUBLE No Battery TROUBLE Sounder Relay TROUBLE Bell Siren 1 TROUBLE Bell Siren 2 TROUBLE Alarm Relay TROUBLE Trouble Relay TROUBLE Reversing Relay TROUBLE Bell Siren 3 TROUBLE Bell Siren 4 System Peripheral Troubles 330 and 340 330 System peripheral 33 Polling loop open 332 Polling loop short 333 Expansion module failure 334 Repeater failure 335 Local printer paper out 336 Local printer failure TROUBLE Sys Peripheral TROUBLE Polling Loop Open TROUBLE Polling Loop Short TROUBLE Exp Mo
143. bsequent pressing of the key steps through each off normal active event with alarm events having a higher priority than trouble and supervisory events 4 1 2 Alarm Silence The Alarm Silence key performs the same functions as Acknowledge Step In addition if an alarm exists it turns off all silenceable NACs Notification Appliance Circuits and causes the Alarm Silenced LED to turn on It also sends an alarm silenced message to the printer history file and optional annunciators A subsequent new alarm will resound the system Note that the Alarm Silenced LED is turned off by pressing the Reset key the Drill key or subsequent activation of the NACS 4 1 3 Drill Hold 2 Sec When the Drill key 1s held for a minimum of two seconds time required to prevent accidental activations the FACP turns on both main panel NAC outputs and all silenceable circuits such as control modules that are programmed as silenceable and turns off the Alarm Silenced LED if it was previously on The EVAC IN SYSTEM message is shown on the LCD display The same message is sent to the printer and history file The Alarm Silence key can be used to turn off all silenceable NAC outputs following activation by the Drill key 4 1 4 Reset Pressing and releasing the Reset key turns off all control modules and NACs temporarily turns off resettable power to 4 wire detectors causes a RESET IN SYSTEM message to be displayed on the LCD and sends the same message to the
144. cation Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in lbs Over tightening may damage threads resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal This system contains static sensitive components Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit Follow the instructions in the installation operating and programming manuals These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation by authorized personnel Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada Cet appareil numerique de la Classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Notes MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Table of Contents Product DGS err T 14 Featur
145. cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No Note The programming for NAC 1 will determine the operation of the remote power supply sync MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 105 Programming 3 6 5 5 2 Type 1 ENABLED The main circuit board NAC type can be programmed by pressing 2 while viewing 2 TYPE NAC Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed Press the down arrow key S SILEHCERBLE to view additional screens Screen 1 NAC 1 BELL 2 HORN 5 S TROBE Type Screen 1 Select the NAC device type by pressing the number corresponding to the type in the appropriate screen When the selection is made the display will return to NAC Screen 1 The following table contains NAC type codes and their functions 3 6 5 5 3 Silenceable Pressing 3 while viewing NAC Screen 1 will cause the display to change to Silenceable No This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from being silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by the Auto Silence feature Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Silenceable Yes and Silenceable No Important When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual devices is programmed for silenceable and the Synced Strobe feature is selected only the audible devices will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed or if the Autosilence feature is enabled The visual devices strobes etc will continue
146. ces and Their Documents ANN Audio Control for ACC 25 50 ZS T Doc 51889 ANN RLY ANN R LED 10 Form C Relay Card LED Display Doc 53033 Doc 53032 g RS omm s TEREALARMANNUNCIAIQOR SJ ANN 80 ANN S PG LED Driver LCD Text Annunciator Doc 151416 Printer Driver Doc 52749 Doc 151417 g9 IPDACT ANN BUS TB9 Internet Communicator AID d NN FT Doc 53109 15 amp PH16 Telephone Connections 8 J5 amp J6 p SLC Loop TB10 Su udi 2 Addressable Devices and SLC Wiring Doc 51309 Battery Connector J9 E a z 3 S Emmm eocoooeeeo ps m Il o e CHG 120F Charger CHG 75 Charger Doc 50888 Doc 51315 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 13 Product Description SECTION 1 Product Description The Fire Lite MS 9200UDLS 1s a combination FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel and DACT Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter all on one circuit board This compact cost effective intelligent addressable control panel has an extensive list of powerful features The combination of Fire Lite s newer se
147. communicating with the control panel the following will be displayed NORMAL SMOKE PHOTOS SHD T 7 lt NOUN gt 1DB817 Edit Detector Screen 1 To change the programming for the displayed detector press the keyboard down arrow key to view the Edit Detector screens In the preceding example V Normal indicates that the detector with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel enabled V lt ADJ gt lt NOUNS represents the adjective and noun which have been programmed describing the location of the displayed device V ZNNN represents the first of five possible software zones that the detector is assigned to NNN the three digit zone number from 000 099 V V or indicates whether or not alarm verification is enabled V alarm verification enabled and alarm verification disabled V 1D017 represents the Loop Device type and Device address 1 SLC Loop D Detector and 017 Detector Address 017 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 67 Programming The following examples show the editing of a photoelectric smoke detector with address 017 located on the SLC loop EDIT DETECTOR 10017 li 1 ZEHHBLED YES 2 TYPE SHOKECPHOTO S VERIFICATION OFF Edit Detector Screen 2 EDIT DETECTOR 10017 1 uUHLKTEST 2 PHS S PRE SIGHHL Edit Detector Screen 3 EDIT DETECTOR 10017 1 20HE ASSIGNMENT BE E ck Edit Detector
148. connecting the batteries to the FACP make E ve certain that the interconnect cable between the y batteries is not connected Do not connect the interconnect cable until the system is completely zm GY installed Observe polarity when connecting the batteries Connect the battery cable to SeePage 9 on the main circuit board Refer Power Supply Calculations on page 187 for calculation of the correct battery rating WARNING Battery contains sulfuric acid which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can destroy fabrics If contact is made with sulfuric acid immediately flush the skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention 2 3 3 Special Application DC Power Output Connection Special Application DC power outputs are power limited refer to UL Power limited Wiring Requirements on page 53 Power limited Resettable or Nonresettable Power Power limited Resettable Power 0 300 amperes max 24 VDC nominal filtered 0 300 amperes max 24 VDC nominal filtered resettable power resettable or nonresettable power can be drawn from can be drawn from TBI Terminals 3 and 4 TB1 Terminals 1 and 2 JP4 is used to configure TB1 Terminals 1 amp 2 for Nonresettable Power jumper pins 1 3 2 Resettable Power jumper pins 2 amp 3 l and 2 of JP4 as shown of JP4 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 92udtb1 cdr Figure 2 5 Special Application Power Outputs 24 V
149. ctive or Noun field may now be changed letter by letter e If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0 9 the number is incremented by one If the last character is a letter it changes to a 0 If the last character is 9 it goes to 0 e The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key As an example the user could quickly enter 3 ROOM 305 as follows 1 The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field Press the zero key twice to display FLR 3 2 With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field press the zero key twice to recall the display ROOM 304 The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field 3 With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305 4 Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field 5 Select a zone number from 00 to 99 700 default zone is the general alarm zone Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 91 Programming 3 6 3 Zone Setup PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 2 will access the Zone Setup screens as 2 POIHT PROGRAM diseases 3 Z NE SETUP RENS Programming Screen 2 ONE SETUP 1 ZEHHBLE 2 DISHBLE S Z0NE 97 Zone Setup Screen 1 ONE SETUP 1 20HES INSTALL
150. d Screen This display will show all of the zones that are enabled in the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones 3 6 3 6 Zones Disabled Pressing 3 for Zones Disabled while viewing Zone Setup Screen 2 will display a screen similar to the following ONES DISABLED AS Zones Disabled Screen This display will show all of the zones that are disabled in the control panel Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones 94 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming ZO ME SETUP 3 6 3 7 Zone Type 1 Z0NE TYPES Zone Types must be programmed only if a DACT programmed for zone reporting 2 20 5 AVAILABLE is installed on the control panel Pressing for Zone Types while viewing Zone eee Setup Screen 3 will display a screen similar to the following Zone Setup Screen 3 TYPE PROG MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR Zones Installed Screen This display will show the system zones default and user programmed and their associated types Note that an up and or down arrow will appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exis
151. d request successful Upload Download failed The key features are listed and explained in the following sections Secret Code Verification A secret code is stored in the control panel by a Service Terminal to prevent unauthorized access The secret code is created at the Service Terminal by the master user and cannot be viewed or changed by anyone other than a master user Viewing of the secret code is prohibited at the control panel Prior to allowing an upload or download of data the control panel will verify the secret code transmitted by the Service Terminal Time out at Control Panel Upon answering an incoming call on either the primary or secondary Central Station phone line the control panel will listen for a modem connection signal If this signal is not received within 50 seconds the control panel will disconnect the call Upon successful connection secret code verified if no communication occurs within 30 minutes the panel will disconnect the call Upon time out transfer activity will be reported to the Central Station if enabled and the connection will be terminated Error Checking As each block of data is received by the control panel it is checked for accuracy If an error is detected the block is retransmitted until correct up to a maximum of four times If the Secret Code is not verified and four errors occur the call is disconnected and the report that the upload download was not successful is called to the Cen
152. ddressable control module programmed for General Alarm and Silenceable allows silencing of the Municipal Box without resetting the panel or box The addressable Control Module must be programmed as Silenceable and General Alarm Connect wires to two red terminals on box Note 1002 maximum loop resistance due to wiring from power supply to Municipal Box Gamewell Model M34 56 Local Energy Municipal Box All contacts shown in energized position white wire m MBT 1 To next device on SLC Loop p e Braided shield Drain Wire brown wire c EOLR 1 Power d 5i J k He e Supervision Relay ad pu e LL a Bs CMF 300 Control Module Alarm polarity shown 24 VDC Nonresettable SLC Loop B B shield e a Im IBS TBA TB7 NO NC C 5 NC NO C TB8 IN IN OUT our TB10 At d A mo un fU ERST R REM TEPWR 15 B e 3B Ape AB 26 Q B uus wer que 95i 45 JP6 P Main Circuit Board 92udls MBT Inew cdr 1 the SLC device does not match the one in this figure refer to the SLC manual wiring conversion charts for legacy and newer versions of the modules Figure C 5 MBT 1 Silenceable MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 203 FACP with Keltron APPENDIX D FACP with Keltron The following figure illustrates the connections between the FACP a
153. digit is keyed in the following screen will be displayed DETECTOR TYPE U 125MOKE PHOTO 2 USER DEF IHNED 1 5 5 1 ION Press the down arrow key to view additional choices Press the number corresponding to the desired selection to program that type to the newly added detector MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 65 Programming When the type has been selected the following screen will be displayed HDD DETECTOR DETECTOR HHS IS ADDED The programmer can continue adding detectors by pressing the ESC key which will return the display to the Add Detector Screen 3 6 2 1 2 Delete Detector DETECTOR Pressing 2 in the Detector Screen will display the Delete Detector Screen which 1 ADD allows the programmer to delete a specific detector 2 DELETE S EDIT DELETE DETECTOR ENTER DETECTOR Job Detector Screen Delete Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit detector address such as 005 When the last digit is keyed in the following screen will be displayed DELETE DETECTOR DETECTOR HHS IS DELETED The programmer can continue deleting detectors by pressing the ESC key which will return the display to the Delete Detector Screen 3 6 2 1 3 Edit Detector The programmer can change a detectors existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in the Detector Screen The following screen will be disp
154. dule Fail TROUBLE Repeater Failure TROUBLE Printer Paper Out TROUBLE Local Printer MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions EVENT MESSAGE Communication Troubles 350 and 360 350 Communication TROUBLE Communication Trouble 35 Telco 1 fault TROUBLE Phone Line 1 352 Telco 2 fault TROUBLE Phone Line 2 353 Long range radio xmitter fault TROUBLE Radio Transmitter 354 Fail to communicate TROUBLE Fail to Communicate 355 Loss of radio supervision TROUBLE Radio Supervision 356 Loss of central polling TROUBLE Central Radio Polling Protection Loop Troubles 370 370 Protection loop TROUBLE Protection Loop 37 Protection loop open TROUBLE Protection Loop Open 372 Protection loop short TROUBLE Protection Loop Short 373 Fire Trouble TROUBLE Fire Loop Sensor Troubles 380 380 Sensor trouble TROUBLE Sensor Trouble 381 Loss of supervision RF TROUBLE RF Sensor Supervision 382 Loss of supervision RPMTROUBLE RPM Sensor Supervision 383 Sensor tamper TROUBLE Sensor Tamper 384 RF transmitter low battery TROUBLE RF Sensor Batt Open Close 400 400 Open Close OPENING CLOSING 401 Open Close by user OPENING User CLOSING User 402 Group Open Close OPENING Group User CLOSING Group User 403 Automatic Open Close OPENING Automatic CLOSING Automatic 404 Late Open Close OPENING Late CLOSING Late
155. e This is a convenient method for quickly bringing the FACP addressable SLC devices on line without the necessity of programming each device individually Refer to Autoprogram on page 64 for a detailed description of Autoprogramming Manual programming or editing using the FACP keypad or a PC keyboard Remote Programming and Editing Feature allows creation and editing of site specific custom programs using a Windows based computer and modem For programs requiring a large amount of data entry this method may be preferred A PK CD programming CD ROM can be ordered for this purpose Local Programming and Editing Feature allows creation and editing of site specific custom programs using a Windows based computer and the FACP USB connection For programs requiring a large amount of data entry this method may be preferred A PK CD programming CD ROM can be ordered for this purpose The System All Normal screen will be displayed in a programmed system with no active alarms troubles or supervisories as illustrated below SYSTEM ALL NORMAL 1 812166 Read Status mode can be entered while the panel is in any mode of operation If an alarm or supervisory event exists at the panel the event must be cleared before entering Programming mode To access any of the programming or read status features the Enter or Mode key must be pressed which will cause the LCD to display the following 1 READ STATUS MODE PROGRAMMING MOD
156. e Station receiving unit having compatible ratings Maximum load for each circuit 10 mA Reverse polarity output voltage 24 VDC Remote Alarm and Remote Trouble wiring can leave the building Before installing the module place the disconnect switch to the right disconnect position to prevent accidental activation of the municipal box Note that a Disconnect LED will illuminate after the module is installed in the MS 9200UDLS In addition the System Trouble LED will turn on to indicate the Disconnect condition Note The 4X TMF Module is not directly suitable for transmitting a reverse polarity supervisory signal For applications using reverse polarity of a supervisory signal refer to FACP with Keltron on page 204 1 Remote Alarm power limited Wiring from these terminals can exit the protected premises Dummy load terminals No connection 6 and 7 4 7kQ watt Istor 1f Municipal Municipal Box nonpower limited 16 ar Ed Polarities are shown for module activation Remote Trouble power limited Disconnect LED Axtmfl cdr ae e a Disconnect Switch shown in disconnect day c osition qu 7 LLLI P TBL Jumper emm Figure 2 15 4X TMF Transmitter Module Connect to FACP J10 amp J11 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Installation The following steps must be followed when installing the AX TMF module 1 Remove all power Pri
157. e Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Point Ranges 21 30 31 40 and 41 50 51 60 61 70 71 80 81 90 and 91 99 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN LED Module MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 127 Programming 128 ANN RLY Options Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN BUS Address Screen when the ANN RLY option is selected will cause the following screen to be displayed ANH RLY ADDR l i RELAY 1 ZONE a Z2 RELHV 2 ONE 81 S RELHY 3 ONE B2 ANN RLY Options Screen The ANN RLY module provides ten Form C relays which can be programmed for various functions The initial screen displays Relays 1 through 3 Pressing the down arrow key will display the remaining relays for this module To program any of the ANN RLY relays while viewing the appropriate ANN RLY Option screen press the number key corresponding to the relay to be programmed Following is a list of the available programming options for each relay Alarm Supervisory Su
158. e operator to view the final results of the most recent walktest The following screen will be displayed WALKTEST RESULTS View Result Screen Use the up and down arrow keys to view all of the walktest results which will be displayed Note that the Walktest log 1s stored in RAM If all power AC and DC is removed from the FACP the Walktest log information will be lost This information is also overwritten when subsequent walktests are performed MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 9 Option Modules mx E Options available for the MS 9200UDLS include ACS Series Graphic and LCD 2 MBLKTEST annunciators printer connection for acquiring hardcopy printouts of panel data and PC S OPTION MODULES Personal Computer connection for uploading and downloading panel data Programming Screen 3 Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen 3 will display the following screen OPTION MODULES 1 HANNUNCIATORS 2 ONBOHRD DACT S PRINTER PC PRA4SBH Options Screen Note that 4800 in the display indicates that a supervised printer configured for 4800 baud has been previously programmed into the system 3 6 9 1 Annunciators Pressing while viewing the Options Screen will cause the control panel to display the following screens ANNUNCTATORS 1 TERM ENABLED 2 HCS OPTIONS S HANN BUS OPTIONS A Terminal Mode annunciator ACS Mode annunciator or ANN BUS annunciator module can be installed in the MS 9200UD
159. e set to any number between 01 and 08 Note that 00 is not a valid address The following table shows the DIP switch setting for each address Note address ID Number DIP switches on some devices may have more than 5 switch positions Unless otherwise specified in the documentation supplied with each device switch positions 6 and above must be set to OFF Address Switch 5 Switch 4 Switch 3 Switch 2 Switch 1 not valid OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 01 02 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 0 OFF OFF OFF ON ON 0 N 3 05 OFF OFF OFF 06 ON ON OFF 07 OFF OFF ON ON ON 08 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON Note Switch 5 must be set to OFF for ANN BUS devices to be recognized 01 27 09 27 Product Description 28 1 8 7 3 ANN 80 Remote Fire Annunciator The ANN 80 Annunciator is a compact 80 character backlit LCD remote fire annunciator It mimics the display on the control panel and will annunciate device type point alarm trouble or supervisory condition zone assignment plus any custom alpha labels programmed into the FACP The annunciator also provides system status LEDs to display AC Power Alarm Trouble Supervisory and Alarm Silenced conditions Additionally the annunciator is capable of remotely performing critical system functions such as Acknowledge Silence Reset and Drill Communication between the ANN 80 and FACP is accomplished over a two wire RS 485 serial interface employing the ANN B
160. e software zones Each software zone however may have from 1 to 99 addressable input devices assigned to it and from 1 to 99 addressable output devices assigned to it Monitor and control modules comprise one group of 99 addresses with each module having a unique address from 1 to 99 Detectors comprise a separate group of 99 addresses each detector having a unique address from 1 to 99 in its group Be careful not to duplicate addresses within any one group modules and detectors Refer to the following page for an example of zoning In the example on the following page e Zone 01 has the following addressable devices assigned to it V SD350 smoke detectors with addresses 07 and 02 V MMF 300 monitor module with address 07 V MMF 302 monitor module with address 02 and 03 V CMF 300 control modules with addresses 05 06 07 09 and 13 Zone 02 has the following addressable devices assigned to it Y Y MMF 302 monitor module with addresses 02 and 03 V CP350 smoke detectors with addresses 03 and 04 V CMF 300 control modules with addresses 06 09 and 10 e Zone 03 has the following addressable devices assigned to it 50350 smoke detectors with addresses 05 06 and 07 V MMF 302 control module with address 04 CMF 300 control modules with addresses 09 11 and 12 The example points out some of the key assignment features of the MS 9200UDLS Addresses of detectors are not duplicated Addresses of monitor and control modules are not duplicated The con
161. e used to provide an interface to a custom graphic LED annunciator LI Legacy ACM SRF Relay Control Module Reference Mama The ACM 8RF module provides eight Form C relays with contacts rated for 5 amps 1 9 Getting Started The following is a brief summary of the minimal steps involved in bringing an MS 9200UDLS on line Install Backbox and Main Circuit Board refer to Mounting Backbox on page 45 e Address and Install Intelligent Devices refer to the SLC Wiring Manual e Enter Autoprogramming refer to Autoprogram on page 64 Resolve Programming Conflicts Goto Point Program to Enter Specific Data refer to Point Program on page 65 Use the right and left arrow keys to navigate between devices MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 4 Product Description 42 1 10 Telephone Requirements and Warnings 1 10 1 Telephone Circuitry Ringer Equivalence Number REN 0 0B AC Impedance 10 0 Mega Ohm Complies with FCC Part 68 Mates with RJ31X Male Connector Supervision Threshold loss of phone line voltage for 2 minutes The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be con nected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the
162. e with NFPA 72 after any programming operation or change in site specific software Reacceptance testing is required after any change addition or deletion of system components or after any modification repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring All components circuits system operations or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 10096 tested In addition to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected at least 10 of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change up to a maximum of 50 devices must also be tested and proper system operation verified This system meets NFPA requirements for indoor dry operation at 0 49 C 32 120 F and at a relative humidity of 93 2 RH non condensing at 32 x2 C 90 3 F However the useful life of the system s standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity Therefore it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room tempera ture of 15 27 C 60 80 F Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops Refer to manual Specifications section for maximum allowable drop from the specified device voltage FCC Warning WARNING This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may c
163. ected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms troubles and supervisories the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the alarm trouble and supervisory status for each of the ten zones in the Point Range programmed for that particular module The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows ANN LED Module 1 Point Range 01 10 Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Battery Fault Fault Charger Fault Fault Disabled Maintenance E 01 02 03 E 04 05 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 01 Point 02 Point 03 Point 04 Point 05 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 01 Point 02 Point 03 Point 04 Point 05 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory ANN LED Module 2 Point Range 11 20 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Troubl
164. ection The options selected for each of these modules will be the same for all modules of the same type refer to ANN S PG Print Options on page 129 ANN 80 Options on page 130 If ANN I O ANN LED or ANN RLY is the selected module type the following ANN BUS Address Screen will be displayed HHhH BUS MODULES HHH BUS ADDRESS 1 TYPE I 2 WHODULE OPTIONS ANN BUS Address Screen Since the options for each of these module types can be individually set pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing the ANN BUS Address Screen will display the available options as described below 01 27 09 119 Programming ANN I O Options Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN BUS Address screen when the ANN I O option is selected will display the following screen HMM I4O0 ADDR 1 i LOOP1 DET 1 30 ACTIVE LEDS ONLY ANN I O Address Screen 1 ANN I 0O ADDR 1 f 1 ZPOIHT ZOHE ANN I O Address Screen 2 ANN I O ADDR 1 T 1 RANGE Z DET MOD ANN I O Address Screen 3 The first screen indicates that the ANN I O at ANN BUS address 1 is programmed to annunciate SLC Loop 1 addressable Detectors with addresses 1 through 30 The programming can be changed using ANN I O Address Screens 2 and 3 Pressing while viewing ANN I O Address Screen 2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate either Point addressable device address information or Zone information Pressing while viewing A
165. ection or consult our factory representatives For any format chosen the control panel automatically programs all of the event codes Select the Communication Format by pressing the corresponding number key while viewing the Comm Format screen The following table describes each format Table 3 2 Communication Formats Screen Selection Communication Format Description ADEMCO CONTACT ID Contact ID DTMF 1400 2300 ACK SIA 8 Security Industry Association 8 messages per call SIA 20 Security Industry Association 20 messages per call Event Codes Pressing while viewing Primary Secondary Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed CENTRAL STATION 1 EVENT CODES Primary Secondary Screen 4 E lJ E C D E 5 1 PULL STATION 2 M0ON USER DEF 1 S WATERFLOW Event Code Screen Pressing the down arrow key allows viewing of all Events associated with the selected Communication Format Pressing the number corresponding to the event displayed in each screen will display its default event code which can be customized by the programmer For example pressing for Pull Station will display the following screen which allows the Event Code to be changed from the default value PULL STATION Event Code Screen The tables on the following pages list all of the Events and their default Event Codes for the various Communication Formats 138 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming Ademco C
166. ed zones will be inhibited from activating for a factory set duration of 15 seconds V pressing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge Step key will start a timer which inhibits output activation for additional time delay of up to three minutes which is user programmable V second alarm occurring anytime during either time delay will cause immediate activation of all associated outputs PAS operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction Note that the PAS BYPASS monitor type code when activated will inhibit the PAS capability until the PAS BYPASS monitor is deactivated While PAS is inhibited signaling devices will immediately place the control panel into alarm This feature may be employed by wiring a normally open device such as a switch to a monitor module which has been programmed for PAS BYPASS MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 165 Operating Instructions 4 20 Special System Timers 4 20 1 Silence Inhibit Timer This option if selected prevents the A arm Silence key from functioning for 60 seconds following an alarm A new alarm during the initial 60 second period will not cause the timer to restart with a new 60 seconds Silence Inhibit operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction 4 20 2 Autosilence Timer If Autosilence is selected the notification appliances programmed as silenceable will automatically be silenced after a programmable duration of from 5 to 30 minutes P
167. eing played A fault at ACC 25 50Z5S Series panel will cause the FACP to indicate a System Trouble and the display will indicate a Voice Evac Fault The only connection between the FACP and ACC 25 50Z5 Series audio panel is a pair of communication wires connected between the A B terminals on TB9 of the FACP and TBI terminals 2 amp 3 of ACC ZPMK module on the audio panel WOOD 1 ACC ZPMK on ACC 25 50ZS Series B ANN BUS TB5 TB8 SLC SLC SLC SLC SHIELD TB10 B A B A B 2494949046 NO NC TBR NC C 006 RELAY 2 RELAY 1 Figure 1 1 FACP Connection to ACC 25 50ZS Series Audio Panel MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description 1 8 8 Legacy ACS Series LED Zone Type Annunciators WARNING Disconnect all sources of power AC and DC before installing or removing any modules or wiring The legacy ACS annunciators may not be used if new ANN BUS annunciators are being used due to incompatible serial communication protocols The legacy ACS Series Annunciators remotely display alarm and trouble status as well as system status In addition they can provide remote Acknowledge Silence Reset and Drill functions For more detailed information refer to the appropriate annunciator manual Following is a list of annunciators which can be used with the MS 92000015 Reference Manual e ACM 16ATF Annunciator Control Module annunciates 16 zones with 16 red alarm LED
168. en 2 Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No If Enabled No is selected the module will not be polled by the control panel preventing the module from activating its output devices The control panel will indicate a system trouble condition and the Disable LED will turn on if any devices are disabled MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 EDIT COHTROL 1 ENABLED Z2 T YPE 5 5 Edit Control Screen 2 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming Type To select the type of control module being programmed press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Control Screen 2 This will cause the control panel to display the following Control Type Screens Press the down arrow key to view additional screens and selections CONTROL 1 ZBLHHK 2 BELL CIRCUIT S HORN CIRCUIT Control Type Screen 1 While viewing one of the Control Type screens select the type of control module being programmed by pressing the corresponding keypad number key The display will return to the Edit Control Screen 2 and indicate the new type selection Note A control relay module set to the Resettable Power type will follow the main circuit board 24 VDC resettable power unless the control relay module is disabled The following table contains control module type codes and their functions which are displayed in the Control Type screens Strobe Circuit NAC Type supervised Control NAC Type supervised
169. ent detector alarms any time during the first detector s verification period the panel will immediately activate all appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP If no additional detector alarms occur within 73 seconds of the first alarm 13 second retard plus 60 second confirmation the timer resets and the panel is ready to verify any new detector alarms which may occur The following is a graphic representation of Alarm Verification 166 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions sec 13 sec 73 sec RETARD 88 CONFIRMATION 60 seconds Detector Alarm Verification Retard Confirmation Detector Goes Into Alarm Alarm Ignored uff Control Panel Processes Alarm if Same Detector is Still in Alarm JM9 ee Verification Period Note Alarm Verification is available only for addressable smoke detectors not conventional smoke detectors 4 21 Walktest Walktest is a feature which allows one person to test the fire alarm system An audible walktest will momentarily sound the Notification Appliance Circuits in the building and store the walktest information in a file at the panel A silent walktest will not sound the NACs but will store the walktest information in a file which can be viewed at the panel Disabled NAC devices will not activate during walktest Alarm Shorted Condition When in audible Walktest the panel responds to each new
170. ent will be displayed on the screen To view all of the selected events press the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the list of events If no events have occurred the display will read NO EVENTS IN HISTORY Pressing 2 while viewing the History Screen will cause the following screen to be displayed ERHSE HISTORY PROCEED 7 1 YES Erase History Screen Pressing while viewing the Erase History Screen will cause the message ERASING HISTORY PLEASE WAIT to be displayed The display will then return to the History Screen Pressing 2 will cause the display to return to the History Screen without erasing the History file 01 27 09 149 Programming 3 7 3 Program Check Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen 1 will cause the following screen to be 2 HISTORV displayed S PROGRAM CHECK PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM Maintenance Screen 1 PROGRAM 1 HHCS INPUT 2 Z0NES NO INPUT S Z0NES NO OUTPUT Program Check Screen The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been programmed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not been programmed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output correlations Pressing while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed HHCS NO INPUT 1 25 31 44 55 6r The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zon
171. enter the user Programming mode press 2 The display will read as follows PROGRAMMING ENTER PASSWORD Entering the Master level password default 00000 will cause the following screen to appear PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM 2 POINT PROGRAM S 2Z0NE SETUP If the Maintenance level password default is entered the following screen will appear PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM 2 HISTORY S PROGRAM CHECK Note that in the two preceding screens an arrow appears to inform the programmer that additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key 62 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 Master Programming Level MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 When the Master Program Level password is entered the control panel will enter user Programming mode In this mode the piezo sounder remains off the trouble relay 1s activated and the system Trouble LED flashes until Programming mode is exited The following display will appear PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM 2 POINT PROGRAM S 20NE SETUP Programming Screen 1 The down arrow which appears in the display indicates that additional programming choices can be viewed by pressing the down arrow key on the keypad If a down and up arrow appear in the display pressing the down arrow key will display the subsequent Programming Screens as illustrated below while pressing the up arrow key will display the previous screen PROGRAMMING 1 LOOP
172. er limited connection to printer ANN S PG Module 24 VDC nonresettable 4 ANN BUS ACS BUS TB1 TB9 1055 5C STEP 2 3 24V 24 AB e NON RST RST POWER POWER g MS 9200UDLS Figure 1 6 ANN S PG Connection to FACP 92udlstospg cdr 3 Using the DIP switches on the back of the ANN S PG module assign an ID number address to the module 4 Select the address and configuration options for the ANN S PG module as described in the Programming section of this manual refer to ANN BUS Options on page 118 Note that the Auto configure feature allows the programmer to quickly bring all installed ANN BUS modules online refer to Auto Configure on page 128 5 Connect a printer to the ANN S PG Parallel or Serial connectors refer to Figure 1 6 Only one printer can be connected 1 8 7 4 1 Specifications e Operating Voltage 24 VDC Current Alarm and Standby 45 mA e Ambient Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 Max Wiring Distance from FACP 6 000 ft 1 800 m Mounting Surface Dimensions 6 W x 7 3 4 H x 1 7 16 D 15 2 cm W x 19 7 cm H x 3 7 em D e For indoor use in a dry location only 1 8 7 4 2 PRN 6F Printer Installation When connected to the FACP via the ANN S PG module the PRN 6F prints the status changes within the control panel and time stamps the printout with the time of day and date that the event occurred It provides 80
173. es must not be used on the same SLC branch 80 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming EDIT MONITOR Pre signal 1 PRE SIGMBL To enable the Pre signal feature press while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 3 until the display reads Pre signal Yes Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Pre signal Yes and Pre signal No Refer to Presignal on page 164 for additional information Edit Monitor Screen 3 See Page Walktest EDIT MONITOR The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the 1 URLKTEST necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation To 2 20 ASSIGNMENT enable devices which are connected to a monitor module for the Walktest feature a 25 press while viewing the Edit Monitor Screen 4 until the display reads Walktest Yes Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No Refer to Walktest on page 167 for additional information Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable monitor module Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 4 displays the following screen MON ZONE ASSIGN 266 24 oZ4eb 266 deb Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to this device The factory default for an unprogrammed device is 700 for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left Ente
174. es 25 31 44 55 and 67 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the NAC zones without input assignments for both NAC 1 NAC 2 NAC 3 and NAC 4 Note If the NACs have been configured for Class A in the Setup option only I and NAC2 will display test information NAC 3 and NAC 4 will display asterisks and will not be included in the test Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the following ONES NO INPUT H9 10 11 1iMeel The Zone No Input screen allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been programmed to at least one input device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an addressable module control module in this example with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any input devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without input assignments 150 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed ZONES NO OUTPUT d5 B B9 16 11 1Dbel The Zone No Output feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been programmed to at least one output device not including general alarm Zone 00 The example in the preceding screen indica
175. es and CO PIO Sse cca arch Secale ivi bern atest sung toe eed UE 14 n em 16 Current vat Dy ML RM Ao Let iSc rs 17 Controls and Indicators 22655 9 euam NM Mae LL MILD IUE 18 ROG CU ISS DPS PAT T t S EET A das e doctos 19 Dieital Alarm Communicator 5 5 9 9 99 09 230 0 eM Lou Ed dte eM dar Nc 19 ComboDells ducet MM I IAM I MA M Cn LM ML 20 Ttelheent Addressable Detectors Newer Senes 2515 9 m HM per EE bas ipao x 20 Intelligent Addressable Modules Newer Series 20 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices 212i vi tope ACE t dona ear UIN EPOR Gleam ate ies 21 Addressable Device A CCCSSOMES 2232 6 25910 Itu DRUMS UEM Eee S Oc EpL iS Cc cob esiti 21 Ophonal Modules teo Noa A aT 21 NE CES SOMES RTT H m 22 UOTA sos ei aera taba cation etiani coat ve opinari punte a EDI 22 DP 9692 Dress Bate dose batte Ve M routes 22 vun 22 BS ALLS BOR e
176. es audio panel connects to FACP via the ACS ANN BUS communication circuit Zones 33 56 on the FACP correspond to the ACC 25 5075 Series audio circuits 1 24 Zone 32 on FACP serves as the All Call zone and will activate all audio panel output circuits The programmer can select which of the five audio messages at the audio panel will play when an FACP input zone goes into alarm refer to Zone Message on page 96 The message will play over the corresponding audio panel output circuit MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 39 Product Description 40 Examples FACP Input programmed to Zone 33 goes into alarm the programmed message for Zone 33 Message 1 2 3 4 or 5 will play over the ACC 25 50Z5 Series output circuit 1 which corresponds to FACP Zone 33 e FACP Input programmed to Zone 1 and Zone 34 Zone 1 is programmed for a Message 1 2 3 4 or 5 and Zone 34 is programmed for No Message goes into alarm the programmed message for Zone will play over the ACC 25 50ZS Series output circuit 2 which corresponds to FACP Zone 34 e ftwo or more input zones are active at the same time the highest priority message will turn on Message 1 is highest priority and Message 5 is lowest and play over the corresponding audio panel output circuit s e Zone 32 is an All Call zone All audio panel output circuits will turn on if Zone 32 is activated and its programmed message will play or the highest priority message currently b
177. es in CLIP mode only refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable devices Optional 4 module conventional reverse polarity city box transmitter e ANN BUS for connection to following optional modules cannot be used if ACS annunciators are used V ANN 80 Remote Annunciator V ANN I O LED Driver V ANN S PG Printer Module V ANN RLY Form C Relay Module V ANN LED Annunciator Module annunciates alarm trouble and supervisory V ANN RLED Annunciator Module annunciates alarms only e Automated activation of the ACC 25 50 ZS T Audio Command Center Legacy ACS TERM Annunciators cannot be used if ANN annunciators are used V ACS Series LED Zone Annunciators V LDM Graphic Annunciator Series V LCD 80F Liquid Crystal Display point annunciator V ACM 8RF Relay Module MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 15 Product Description 1 2 Specifications 16 Refer to Illustration on page 10 for terminal locations and connections AC Power TB11 MS 9200UDLS 120 VAC 60 Hz 3 0 amps MS 9200UDLSE 240 VAC 50 Hz 1 5 amps Wire size minimum 14 AWG 2 00 mm with 600 V insulation Battery Lead Acid Only J9 Maximum Charging Circuit Normal Flat Charge 27 6 0 80 amp Maximum Battery Charger Capacity 18 Amp Hour FACP cabinet holds maximum of two 18 Amp Hour batteries For greater than 26 Amp Hour up to 120 Amp Hour batteries use the CHG 75 or CHG 120F Battery Charger and BB 55F Battery Box Minimu
178. esettable TB10355 55 BO AO a B MS 9200UDLS JP4 1 C 2 24V 24V NON RST RST POWER POWER 92udlstoannio cdr Figure 1 8 ANN I O Connection to FACP 1 8 7 5 4 ANN I O Module LED Wiring There are four 12 pin connectors on the ANN I O module for connecting LEDs Each set of 10 LEDs get their power from Pin 11 of the corresponding connector Internal resistors are sized so that there is approximately 10 mA of current for each LED No series resistors are required LED outputs can be mapped to output circuits Refer to the programming section titled ANN I O Options on page 120 of this manual The LEDs are wired as illustrated in Figure 1 9 Note that the illustration depicts only connectors P1 and P2 Wiring is identical for P3 LEDs 21 30 and P4 LEDs 31 40 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description Pl pin LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 LED 9 om B IN Cathode x A LEDs Anode gt gt gt gt LED 10 LED Power no connection N P2 pins LED 11 LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 LED 15 LED 16 LED 17 LED 18 LED 19 Cathode Anode om A OIN eo LED Power n
179. esettable Power 19 49 current 49 see also Smoke Detector Power 16 Ring Count 133 Ringer Equivalence Number 42 S Secondary Phone 132 Secondary Power Requirements 190 Secret Code 186 Security Features 186 sensitivity 163 179 see also smoke detector sensitivity 163 Service Terminal 132 Signal rate 15 Signaling Line Circuit see also SLC 16 Silence Inhibit 15 109 166 Silenceable control module 88 NAC 106 waterflow 111 Silenceable Alarm Relay 110 silenceable circuits synchronized signals 106 Silenceable waterflow 95 SLC 14 19 current 16 reference manual 16 resistance 16 see also Signaling Line Circuit 14 16 Style 19 voltage 16 wiring length 16 SLC Loop Protocol 97 SLC Style 96 smoke detector chamber reading 178 data 163 178 222 Index sensitivity 15 163 Smoke Detector Power current 16 Software Zones 14 191 sounder 18 Specifications 16 strobe synchronization 15 Style 14 Style Y 50 NAC wiring 51 NC configuration 51 Style Z 50 NAC configuration 51 wiring 52 subscreen 61 supervision Phone Line 2 141 Supervisory 161 SUPERVISORY AR 110 supervisory relay configuring for 4X TMF 57 sync programming 105 see also synchronization 109 sync output 17 current 17 End of Line resistor 17 voltage 17 synchronization 52 164 173 by manufacturer 109 programming 109 see also strobe synchronization 15 synchronized 164 synchronized signals 164 and silenceable circuits 106 System Maintenance Level 153 System Point 1
180. est Yes Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No Refer to Walktest on page 167 for additional information Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable control module Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Control Screen 3 displays the following screen ONE ASSIGNMENT 266 Zk oZ4ekb 266 deb Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to this device The factory default for an unprogrammed device is 700 for general alarm zone A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that 15 to be assigned to this device The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones Z00 When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the Edit Control Screen 3 Noun Adjective The Noun Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the control module currently being programmed Pressing while viewing Edit Control Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed 1 STHHDHED ADJECTIVE 2 S5THHDHED NOUN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Noun Adjective Screen MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE Programming Pressing while v
181. f points are installed the second screen will be displayed which allows the viewing of all untested system points and their status relating to the current walktest session The up and down arrow keys will allow viewing of all untested points If a point is tested while it is being displayed the screen will update and display the next untested point The first line indicates the total number of untested points The second line displays information about an untested point A description on the bottom of the screen will indicate if the displayed point has been disabled if the Walktest option has been disabled for that point or if the point is not yet tested The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through all untested points Pressing 3 for View Summary while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display a new screen which will show a total of the tested detectors tested modules untested detectors and untested modules for the current walktest session The user can perform a one person walktest by activating devices throughout the system As each device is activated the information about the activated device is stored in the Walktest Log The information can be viewed by choosing one of the options from the Unit In Walktest screen To end the Walktest session press the Escape key to return to the Walktest screen Pressing 3 for View Results while viewing the Walktest screen after a walktest session has been completed will allow th
182. f the Z To disable a zone enter the two digit zone number 00 99 After the second digit is entered the zone will be disabled and the cursor will return to the original position The next zone to be disabled can then be entered Press Esc Escape to return to the previous screen 154 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming Pressing 3 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen SPEC PURPOSE 4ONE 1 PH5 9 OFF 2 PRE SIGMHL 3S OFF S TWO STAGE 99 Disable Screen Zones 97 98 and 99 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special purpose applications In the above illustration the three zones are shown Off which means they can be programmed to function in the same manner as all other zones by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen Pressing will cause the display to change to PAS 97 On Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between PAS 97 On and PAS 97 Off When Zone 97 is programmed On a PAS Positive Alarm Sequence activation of any smoke detector will cause Zone 97 to activate By assigning Zone 97 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen an output device connected to the control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel Do not assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condition Pressing 2
183. feature is selected only the audible devices will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed The visual devices strobes etc will continue to operate 4 17 Coded Operation 4 18 Presignal 164 The NAC circuits resident on the control panel main circuit board can be programmed for coded operation The available pulse rates which can be programmed for coded operation are as follows e Continuous Steady output with no pulsing e March Time Pulses at 120 ppm pulses per minute e Temporal Code Pulses at second On l second Off second On second Off second On 1 second Off California Code 10 seconds On 5 seconds Off e Two Stage Pulses at 20 ppm pulses per minute for 3 or 5 minutes depending on programming and then changes to Temporal Presignal option programs an initiating device to delay the activation of NACs and or control modules while allowing visual verification by a person Once a detector or monitor module triggers an alarm the onboard piezo sounds immediately but the NACs are not activated for a user programmed time duration of up to three minutes Note that the alarm relay and communicator will respond to the initial alarm immediately In addition Zone 98 will activate This zone can be programmed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or indicator which the installer designates as a Presignal indication Do not assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using thi
184. following is a typical message that could appear on the LCD display for a device trouble TROUBL SMOKE PHOTO SADI gt lt NOUN INVREP 010506 10001 The information displayed in above example provides the following information e First line in display V The type of event in this example TROUBL indicating a device trouble V Device type identifier in this example SMOKE PHOTO indicates a Photoelectric smoke detector Other device type identifiers which can be displayed include SMOKE ION for Ionization Detector HEAT for Heat Detector CONTROL for Control Module and MONITOR for Monitor Module PULL STATION for a manual pull box etc Refer to Edit Detector on page 66 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 76 and Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 85 for information on additional device types e Second line in display V AD J refers to the user programmed adjective descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC V NOUN refers to the user programmed noun descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC Third line in display NVREP indicates an invalid reply from the addressable device Other possible troubles include SHORT indicating a shorted circuit on an addressable device OPEN indicating an open circuit on an addressable device DIRTY maintenance alert indicating that a detecto
185. g Changing a zone type will only change how it is reported to the Central Station MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 95 Programming 96 SETUP 1 20HE TYPES 2 20NES AVAILABLE S 2Z0NE MESSAGE Zone Setup Screen 3 PROGRAMMING 1 LOOP SETUP 2 SY STEM SETUP S VERIFY LOOP Programming Screen 2 3 6 3 8 Zones Available Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup Screen 3 will display the following screen 5 AVAILABLE 1 B2 BS H4 BS Br HS 16 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 21 The display will show all of the zones that are still available for programming Note that an up and or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display indicating that additional screens of zone information exists Press the up or down arrow key to view additional screens 3 6 3 9 Zone Message Pressing 3 while viewing Zone Setup Screen 3 will display the following screen ZONE MESSAGE g 1 288 MESSAGE 2 2H1 MESSAGE 1 S3 2H2 HO MESSAGE Pressing the down arrow key will display additional screens for Zones up to Z99 Press the number key corresponding to the Zone to be programmed Screens will be displayed allowing the programmer to select Audio Messages 1 through 5 When an audio message is selected the display will return to the Zone Message screen showing the message selected for that particular zone In the example above Zone 01 has been programmed for Audio Message 1 3 6 4 Loop Se
186. g a fire alarm condition with AC power applied v Calculation Column The standby current drawn from the batteries in a non fire alarm condition during a loss of AC power 188 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Power Supply Calculations Table 7 3 contains columns for calculating current draws For each column calculate the current and enter the total in amperes in the bottom row When finished copy the totals from Calculation Column 2 and Calculation Column 3 to Table 7 4 on page 190 Table 7 3 System Current Draw Calculations Calculation Column 1 Calculation Column 2 Calculation Column 3 Primary Non Fire Alarm Current Primary Fire Alarm Current Secondary Non Fire Alarm Current Device Type amps amps amps X current draw Total Qty X current draw Total Qty X current draw Total XTO 0 iam Circuit Boarc X 0 340 9 340 X10 360 0380 XS ANN 80 X 0 U ANN LED X 0 028 X 0 068 X 0 028 ANN RLY X 0 015 X 0 075 X 0 015 ANN I O X 0 035 X 0 200 X 0 035 ANN S PG X 0 045 X 0 045 X 0 045 ACM 8RF X 0 030 0 158 0 030 16 0 040 X 0 056 2 X 0 040 AEM 16ATF AEM 32AF AFM 16ATF AFM 32AF AFM 16AF X 0 002 X 0 018 7 X 0 002 X 0 040 X 0 056 7 X 0 040 E X 0 025 X 0 065 7 X 0 025 LDM 32F L 3 X 0 040 X 0 056 X 0 040 LDM E32F X 0 002 X 0 018 X 0 002 LCD 80F X 0 064 Detector Heads 1 P 7
187. g functions at regular intervals while in Normal mode V Monitors AC input voltage and battery voltage V Monitors and reports status of SLC loop option cards and control panel v Polls all devices on the SLC loop and flashes each device LED while checking for valid replies alarms troubles etc V Refreshes LCD display and updates time V Scans control panel keypad for key presses V Performs autotest for all SLC devices V Tests memory V Updates and reads all communications busses EIA 485 EIA 232 etc 4 4 Trouble Operation With no alarms in the system the detection of a trouble will cause the following e piezo to pulse 1 second On and 1 second Off e The system Trouble LED to flash one second On and one second Off The trouble relay to activate TROUBL with device type noun adjective address and trouble description will appear on the LCD display e The same message along with the time and date is sent to the optional printer and the history buffer e Communicate the trouble conditions to the Central Station e Terminate upload or download communications Note that specific troubles will initiate additional actions for example loss of AC power will turn off the AC Power LED a ground fault will turn on the Ground LED etc 158 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions Addressable Smoke Detectors Monitor Modules and Control Modules For addressable devices connected to the SLC loop the
188. hat the XRM 24B and XRM 24BE are only suitable for use with MS 9200UDLS E with main circuit board number 03611 This circuit board can also be identified by using the software revision of 9200UDV4 0 meaning version 4 0 or later 9200xfor cdr Batteries The MS 9200UDLS cabinet provides space for two batteries up to 18 Amp Hour Batteries larger than 18 Amp Hour require an external charger such as the CHG 75 or CHG 120F and a UL listed battery box such as the BB 55F Batteries must be ordered separately Battery Cable P N 75287 9200batt cdr 1 6 1 Intelligent Addressable Detectors Newer Series Intelligent addressable detectors provide information to the control panel on an SLC Signaling Line Circuit refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for detailed information on device installation wiring and operation This allows the control panel to continually process the information to determine the status alarm trouble maintenance or normal of each detector Each detector responds to an SLC address that is set in the detector head using built in rotary decimal switches The maximum address cannot exceed address 99 Note that a blinking LED on an intelligent detector indicates communication between the detector and the control panel These devices 350 Series or newer can operate in CLIP mode Classic Loop Interface Protocol or LiteSpeed mode to provide a quicker response They
189. hat the passwords will not be displayed on LCD annunciators The following screen will appear when any change option is selected ENTER NEW FIVE DIGIT PASSWORD V Enter Password Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the center of the display Enter a new five digit password such as 10101 for the Master Level After the fifth digit is entered the following screen will be displayed VERIFY PASSWORD S Password Change Screen Re enter the new password to accept the change The display will return to the initial Password Change Screen MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 143 Programming 3 6 11 Clear Program PROGRAMMING 1 PASSWORD CHANGE Pressing 2 while viewing Programming Screen 4 will select the Clear Program 2 CLERR PROGPOM option This will cause the LCD to display the following screen S PROGRAM CHECK Programming Screen 4 CLEAR FPRUGRAM L WHOLE SYSTEM 2 HLL POINTS Clear Program Screen 1 Pressing for Whole System while viewing the Clear Program Screen 1 will clear all general system programming options and all programmed addressable devices from the nonvolatile memory of the FACP This function is useful when the control panel is first installed prior to autoprogramming Note that it is necessary to autoprogram after SeePage Using the Clear Whole System function Pressing 2 for ALL POINTS while viewing the Clear Program Screen 1 will clear all programming related to
190. he appropriate NFPA standard are listed below MS 9200UDLS Control Panel Contains the main control board cabinet backbox and door main power supply transformer and power supply Batteries Refer to Power Supply Calculations on page 187 for Standby Power Requirements Initiating Devices Connected to one of the control panel s Initiating Device Circuits Notification Appliances Connected to the control panel s Notification Appliance Circuits via a control module The following additional equipment is needed for compliance with the NFPA 72 standards listed below NFPA 72 NATIONAL FIRE ALARM STANDARDS FOR NFPA 72 Central Station Service Protected Premises Unit or Remote Station Service Onboard Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter for connection to a compatible listed Central Station DACR or Protected Premises Receiving Unit This unit must be installed as outlined in Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter on page 19 OR 4XTMF Transmitter Module for connection to the RS82 Remote Station Receiver See Figure C 2 Remote Station Connection Using 4AXTMF Module on page 200 for installation instructions for this unit NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System F Transmitter Module for connection to a compatible listed Local Energy Municipal Box This unit must be installed as illustrated in the section titled 4X TMF Transmitter Module Installation on page 56 and as outlined in Figure C 1 Municipal Box Connected to
191. he general alarm relay and general alarm zone ZOO e trouble relay is not activated e Store event in history buffer e Terminate upload or download communications e Alarms must be Acknowledged before the FACP can be reset A typical alarm display would be as illustrated below ALARM PULL STATION SADI gt lt MOUN gt ZH 16 010506 lhda8l Note that the device type which in this example is PULL STATION can be any other programmable alarm type The information displayed in the above example provides the following information e First line in display V The type of event in this example ALARM indicating an alarm condition V Device type identifier in this example PULL STATION indicates a manual pull box Other device type identifiers which can be displayed include SMOKE ION for Ionization Detector HEAT for Heat Detector CONTROL for Control Module and MONITOR for Monitor Module PULL STATION for a manual pull box etc Refer to Edit Detector on page 66 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 76 and Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 85 for information on additional device types e Second line in display V AD J refers to the user programmed adjective descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC V NOUN refers to the user programmed noun descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC MS 9200UDLS PN 52750
192. he left The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed This information will appear on the display along with the standard device label information A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position For example to enter the letter B press the 2 ABC key three times to toggle through the characters A and B Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the QZ key four times until a blank appears in the desired position When all characters have been entered press the Enter key to store the information The display will return to the Edit Control Screen 4 displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen Recall Increment Function In addition the user may use the Recall Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows Ifthe zero key is pressed a 0 is placed in the first letter position e If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions the entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed and the cursor moves to the last character of the field Recall function The Recalled Adje
193. he secondary power source use Calculation Column 3 in Table 7 3 on page 189 When calculating current draw and the battery size note the following e Primary refers to the main power source for the control panel e Secondary refers to the control panel s backup batteries All currents are given in amperes A Table 7 2 shows how to convert milliamperes and microamperes to full amperes Table 7 2 Converting to Full Amperes To convert Multiply Example Milliamperes mA to mA x 0 001 3 mA x 0 001 0 003A amperes Microamperes UA to amperes uA x 0 000001 300 uA x 0 000001 0 0003 A 7 3 2 How to Use Table 7 3 on page 189 to Calculate System Current Draw Use Table 7 3 on page 189 to calculate current draws as follows 1 Enter the quantity of devices in all three columns 2 Enter the current draw where required Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for compatible devices and their current draw 3 Calculate the current draws for each in all columns 4 Sum the total current for each column 5 Copy the totals from Column 2 and Column 3 to Table 7 4 on page 190 Following are the types of current that can be entered into Table 7 3 on page 189 Calculation Column 1 The primary supply current load that the control panel must support during a non fire alarm condition with AC power applied v Calculation Column 2 The primary supply current load that the control panel must support durin
194. hich is programmed to an on board NAC that NAC will go directly to 2nd stage coding output All other NACs not directly mapped to the activated alarm point s zone but assigned to Zone will activate with a Ist stage output 3 If after the programmed time of 3 or 5 minutes the Acknowledge switch has not been pressed all NACs presently in Ist stage activation will go to 2nd stage activation 4 If an Acknowledge switch has been pressed any NACS currently in Ist stage activation will remain in Ist stage Pressing the Acknowledge switch does not affect NACs already in 2nd stage activation 5 If another alarm point is activated and the countdown timer is counting the alarm point will have no effect on the NACs unless the alarm point s zones are directly mapped to one of the NACs in which case it will follow the procedure outlined in step 2 6 If another alarm point is activated and the countdown timer has stopped counting due to the Acknowledge switch being pressed the countdown timer will restart and the NACs will respond as outlined in step 2 NACs already in 2nd stage activation will not be affected 7 Any control modules assigned to special Zone 99 will be activated either by direct mapping of an input device programmed to Zone 99 or if the timer counts down to zero or when any NAC goes into 2nd stage coding 8 Control modules that are programmed to the same zone as the activated input device will not be delayed for activation MS
195. i ANNSPGSpBis 1 LYerSe ng 0o ANNSPGOWlmeTmer 6 Daylight Savings Embed ANN S PGPrinter Supervision Month Start Daylight Savings March Piezo Enabled Yso o Week Start Daylight Savings Week Lock Enabled Yes Month End Daylight Savings November ANN 80 Acknowledge Button Enabled Yes Week End Daylight Savings Week1 ANN 80 Silence Button Enabled Wein OFF Reset Button Enabled Yes Drill Button Enabled Yes Presignal meri ANNGOPointZone LWaerowReadTime 0 SSC NACIIS amp iEmble Embed NACI L3 amp iSlenede Yes ANNRIYRehy O Zom NACLI3 amp iTp Bio o f NACT 2 3 amp 4 Syne Type System Sensor Relay 0 NACT 2 3 amp 4 Auosilene 0 Zo PNACT 2 3 amp 4 Coding Stay ANN LED Afarms ATS Alarm Supy _ PNACI2 3 amp 4Zones Zom ony ANNLEDRange 0 9 o NACIIS amp iSimeImhbt MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 197 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements APPENDIX C 198 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements The MS 9200UDLS has been designed for use in commercial industrial and institutional applications and meets the requirements for service under the National Fire Protection Association NFPA Standards outlined in this Appendix The minimum system components required for compliance with t
196. ide the supplied anti static bag and store in a safe location until it can be reinstalled in the backbox V Mark and predrill hole in the wall for the center top keyhole mounting bolt using the dimensions illustrated in Figure 2 3 on page 47 V Install center top fastener in the wall with the screw head protruding V Place backbox over the top screw level and secure V Mark and drill the left and right upper and lower mounting holes Note outer holes closest to sidewall are used for 16 O C stud mounting V Install remaining fasteners and tighten Main Circuit Board on chassis T TROUBLE KGSOFF mounting studs mounting slots O2udchassisinbox cdr O O Backbox Figure 2 1 MS 9200UDLS Chassis Removal 01 27 09 45 Installation 2 2 Mounting Optional Transformer Remounting Chassis XRM 24B E transformer is supplied standard with the control panel An optional second XRM 24B E transformer can be ordered and installed to provide maximum system power Install the transformers in the locations indicated in the following illustration 6 The standard transformer is premounted to the chassis If the optional second transformer has been ordered mount it to the chassis as illustrated below The chassis does not need to be removed to install the optional transformer 7 When the location is dry and free of construction dust install the chassis transformer circuit board assembly
197. iewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following 2 STANDARD NOUN screen s to be displayed Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE to see all the Adjective screens Press the number corresponding to the adjective 4 CUSTOM NOUN that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the control module currently Noun Adjective Screen being pro grammed PE TM 1 ZHORTH 2 SO0UTH S EHST Adjective Screen 1 pepe fes e fen 1 5 li 2 FRONT 3 CENTER Adjective Screen 2 1 RERR li 2 UPPER 3 LOWER Adjective Screen 3 sedens ejes defendens 1 MAIM 2 FIRST S3 2HD Adjective Screen 4 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 1 23ED 2 4TH 3 5TH Adjective Screen 5 1 FLOOR 1 2 FLOOR 2 S FLOOR 3 i FLOR Ll Adjective Screen 6 ERE PP ER EE EE pp e eee 1 FLOOR 4 t 2 FLOOR 5 3 R00M Adjective Screen 7 89 Programming 90 I ZSTHENDBED BBIEETIUE Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following 2 STBNDORD NOUN screen s to be displayed Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE to see all the Noun screens Press the number corresponding to the noun that is to 4 CUSTOM NOUN be used as a descriptor for the location of the control module currently being Noun Adjective Screen programmed eee
198. ific Requirements C 1 Central Station Remote Station Transmitter Connection to FACP Dry Contacts The dry contacts of the FACP programmable relays can be used to trip a UL 864 Listed Central Station Remote Station Transmitter The FACP contacts must be supervised by the Central Station Remote Station Transmitter module using End of Line Resistors ELRs with a value determined by the Transmitter manufacturer Power is also provided by the Central Station Remote Station Transmitter manufacturer Refer to the Central Station Remote Station Transmitter manufacturer s manual for details Typical Central Station Remote Station Transmitter Module Typical Input Zone Triggers OOOOOOO00L oooooooo n u m Note The Trouble Relay is a fail safe relay With power applied to the FACP and no troubles in the panel the wiring should be connected to the NO and C contacts as indicated in the illustration SLC SLC SLC SLC SHIELD TB10 At B A A B TB8 IN IN OUT OUT TB9 2 O FACP Main Circuit Board Figure C 4 FACP Dry Contacts Connection to Central Station Remote Station Transmitter ms9200udlsdryxmit cdr 202 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 NFPA Standard Specific Requirements C 2 MBT 1 Municipal Box Trip Silenceable The following figure illustrates the connection of the MBT 1 Municipal Box Trip between the FACP and a Local Energy Municipal Box The use of an a
199. ill cause the following screen to be displayed Primary Secondary Screen 2 H LI E E 24 NUMBERS MAA IMUM Phone Number Screen The Phone Number screen is used to enter the Central Station phone number that the DACT will be contacting A maximum of 20 characters can be entered with valid entries being 0 9 and A C where A B and C 2 seconds pause A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the screen Enter the first digit then press the right arrow key to move the cursor to the right one position Enter the second digit and repeat the process until all digits are entered Press the Enter key to store the phone number in memory Enter the digits as you would like the number to be dialed For example if it s necessary to dial 9 before dialing a number outside the building you may wish to pause after dialing 9 Enter 9 followed by D for a three second pause or E for a five second pause then the phone number followed by an F to indicate the end of the number MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 137 Programming Communication Format LLL Pressing while viewing Primary Secondary Screen 3 will cause the following screen to be 1 C displayed Primary Secondary Screen 3 Id Id F E hl H T 1 HPEMCO CONTACT ID 2 SIH 8 S SIAH 2H The Communication Format is determined by the type of receiver that the DACT is transmitting to Consult your Central Station for proper sel
200. in the 7 AH to 18 AH range The control panel cabinet is capable of housing batteries up to 18 AH Batteries larger than 18 AH require a UL listed external battery charger and cabinet such as the BB 26 BB 55F or other UL listed external battery cabinet 190 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Software Zones APPENDIX A Software Zones A 1 Correlations Setup and configuration of an addressable system 15 different than a conventional system In a conventional system assignment of input devices smoke detectors pull stations heat detectors etc to zones is accomplished through wiring The wiring is direct from clearly marked panel terminals to any device assigned to a particular zone Connection of output devices horns bells strobes etc in a conventional system is accomplished by direct wiring of the output devices to Notification Appliance Circuit terminals In an addressable system a minimum of a single pair of wires SLC communication loop is used to connect all addressable input and output devices Communications between the FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel and all addressable devices takes place over the wire pair which originates from the FACP Software programming is used to configure the system as opposed to direct wiring Zone assignments are created via software means hence the term software zones Setup of an MS 9200UDLS software zone is accomplished by panel programming Each addressable device can be assigned to a maximum of fiv
201. ings 43 Lor Canadian a tede stade Peau aedes e 44 ecc 45 Mount nS ACK OX E E 45 Mounting Optional Transformer Remounting Chassis 46 igo 49 AC Power and Earth Ground Connection ches EU dee 49 OW E m 49 Special Application DC Power Output Connection 49 IMS ERE m UU UU UT 50 INGtificalioneA pplianCe CIECHIUS od Que bod papi optet sadi tub nade Mina sed GE Toss Sun deus adis ose 50 Connie urne NAC Shree e tibt Aes enn rer 51 Sivle y Class BINAC WINNE sete ia 51 CESSA NAC W IE NETTE mE 52 Remote Synchronization OUUU eio o res eder cou pred ae chau a E A 52 UL Power Winne Requirermebls rormannen 53 6 sesaran 54 Optional IDs pus Gur 55 ZXTME Transmitter Module Installation reet e e tee ee terae eats dauid 56 lulio I tes 57 la viral irte E EEE
202. int Option If Point is selected as the module option the first ten LEDs on the first ANN I O module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and 40 LEDs on each additional module will display the active alarm status of each point in the Point Range programmed for that particular module The points that will be annunciated on a particular ANN I O module depend on the programming options selected as far as the device type detector or module to be annunciated The LED assignments for each ANN I O module will be as follows Bu Range Point as Point Pos 1 AC Fault Fault Point Fix H sse a Salar Sense K Sf Charger Fate NACFk Disabled Point 01 Point 02 Point 03 Point 04 Point 05 Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 Point 10 Point 11 Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Point 21 Point 22 Point 23 Point 24 Point 25 Point 26 Point 27 Point 28 Point 29 Point 40 Point 41 Point 42 Point 43 Point 44 Point 45 Point 46 Point 47 Point 48 Point 49 Point 50 Point 51 Point 52 Point 53 Point 54 Point 55 Point 56 Point 57 Point 58 Point 59 Point 60 Point 61 Point 62 Point 63 Point 64 Point 65 Point 66 Point 67 Point 68 Point 69 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Point Point71 Point Point 73 Point 74 Point 75 Point 76 Point 77
203. int Program Screen 2 MODULES 1 ZHDD Z2 DELETE S EDIT Modules Screen 3 6 2 2 1 Add Module Pressing while viewing the Modules Screen will display the following screen which allows the programmer to add a new module address to programming HDD MODULE ENTER MODULE Ft Add Module Screen 1 A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit module address such as 005 When the last digit is keyed in the following screen will be displayed HDD MODULE 1 CONTROL 2 MONI TOR Add Module Screen 2 Pressing for Control Module or 2 for Monitor Module will cause the following MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 75 Programming screen to be displayed HDD MODULE MODULE HHS IS ADDED Add Module Screen 3 The programmer can continue adding modules by pressing the ESC or left arrow key which will return the display to the Add Module Screen 1 3 6 2 2 2 Delete Module Pressing 2 in the Modules Screen will display the Delete Module Screen which MODULES allows the programmer to delete a specific module 1 ADD 2 DELETE S EDIT DELETE MODULE Modules Screen EHTEE FFF Delete Module Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left Using the panel keypad key in the module address such as 005 When the last digit is keyed in the following confirmation that the module has been de
204. ire entry and beginning again 100 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 TIME AND DATE 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Time amp Date Screen 2 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming 3 6 5 3 2 Date To change the date press 2 while viewing the Time Date Screen The following screen will be displayed ENTER y SS MONTH DAY YEAR 04 07 2006 Date Screen A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display Below the cursor is the current date To change the date enter the two digit month followed by the two digit day and then the two digit year 01 for 2001 02 for 2002 etc The cursor will move one position to the right each time a digit is entered After the last year digit is entered the display will return to the Time Date Screen which will show the new date entry If an error is made while entering a digit press the CLR key to delete the entire entry and beginning again 3 6 5 3 3 Clock Format The clock can be configured to display 12 hour AM amp PM or 24 hour military time Pressing 3 while viewing the Time Date screen will cause the display to toggle between 12 and 24HR Select 12HR for 12 hour display or 24HR for 24 hour display Note If the clock is changed to 24 hour military format the date will change to the European standard of Day Month Year for display purposes only 3 6 5 3 4 Daylight Savings Time Pressing while viewing Time Date Screen 2 will cause the following screens to
205. ired baud rate 2 for 4800 Baud for example will program the control panel for the selected baud rate and return the display to the Option Module Screen which will indicate Printer PC PR4800 for a supervised printer installed at 4800 baud rate Pressing 5 while viewing the Printer PC Screen will program the control panel for a PC connection The display will return to the Option Module Screen which will indicate Printer PC PC for personal computer installed Note The LCD 80F and the Printer PC use the same TBS terminal block Only one device can be used at any one time Setting any option in the Printer PC screen to Yes will disable communications with the LCD 80F The printer must be installed in the same room and within 50 feet of the FACP 142 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 10 Password Change PROGRAMMING The factor r hich h n programmed into the control panel can 1 PRSSuDORD CHANGE e factory set passwords which have been progra ed into the control panel can be changed by selecting the Password Change option Pressing while viewing 2 CLEAR PROGRAM i PROGRAHM CHECK Programming Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed Programming Screen 4 PASSWORD CHANGE 1 MASTER 2 MAINTENANCE S REMOTE DOWNLOAD Password Change Screen Press to change the Master Programming Level password 2 to change the Maintenance Level password or 3 to change the Remote Download password Note t
206. iring Nonresettable or Resettable Special Application Power 24 VDC Nominal TBI Terminals 1 amp 2 Jumper selectable JP4 for conversion to resettable power output Maximum ripple voltage l0mV gy Total DC current available from each output is up to 0 300 amps see Figure 1 1 Power limited circuit Four Wire Resettable Special Application Smoke Detector Power 24 VDC nominal TB1 Terminals 3 4 amp 4 Maximum ripple voltage 10 mVgygs Up to 0 300 amps is available for powering 4 wire smoke detectors see Figure 1 1 Power limited circuit Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Special Application Nonresettable or Resettable Power Special Application Resettable Power for 4 Wire Smoke Detectors 1 NAC 3 NAC 2 NAC 4 M c Refer to the battery calculations section for additional information MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Product Description Remote Sync Output TB2 Remote power supply synchronization output 24 VDC nominal special application power Maximum current is 40 mA End of Line Resistor 4 7KQ Output linked to NAC 1 control Supervised and power limited circuit EIA 485 TERM or EIA 232 Serial TB8 EIA 485 Terminal Mode annunciator connections Terminal 1 In 2 In 3 Out 4 Out EIA 232 PC Printer applications connections Terminal 1 Transmit 2 Receive 3 DTR 4 Ground EIA
207. is installed Jumper on the main circuit board must be cut to allow supervision of the module MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 21 Product Description 1 8 Accessories 22 1 8 1 PS Tools Programming Utility The PS Tools Programming Utility can be used to locally or remotely program the FACP directly from most IBM compatible computers PC running Windows XP or newer FACP program files can also be created and stored on the PC and then downloaded later to the control panel The PK CD Kit includes the Windows based Programming Utility software on CD ROM with on line help file A standard USB cable with male A to male B connectors which must be purchased separately is required for local connection of the PC to the USB port J12 on the FACP main circuit board Remote programming requires that the PC have a 2400 baud or faster modem Important Remote modification of FACP programming requires that the panel be enabled for remote download refer to Remote Site Upload Download on page 184 Remote interrogation of panel programming history logs detector status etc is possible without enabling the remote download option 1 8 2 DP 9692 Dress Panel An optional dress panel DP 9692 is available for the MS 9200UDLS required by ULC for Canadian installations The dress panel restricts access to the system wiring while allowing access to the key panel A ground strap must be connected between the stud on the inside of the
208. l appear at the first asterisk to the left The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed This information will appear on the display along with the standard device label information A maximum of 20 characters including spaces can be entered To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position For example to enter the letter B press the 2 ABC key three times to toggle through the characters 2 A and B Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the QZ key four times until a blank appears in the desired position When all characters have been entered press the Enter key to store the information The display will return to the Edit Detector Screen 5 displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen Recall Increment Function In addition the user may use the Recall Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Description Adjective or Noun field as follows If the zero key is pressed a 0 is placed in the first letter position If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions the entire field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed and the cursor moves to the last character of the field
209. layed EDIT DETECTOR ENTER POINT BDDREESS Edit Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit detector address such as 017 When the last digit is keyed in if the selected address has not been added to programming a screen showing information about a device that is installed with a lower address closest to the selected address will be displayed 66 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming If no detectors have been installed on the loop the following will be displayed HO DETECTOR INSTALLED Edit Detector Screen 1 If the selected address has been added to programming device summary screens will be displayed These screens allow the programmer to view all device settings at a single glance Pressing the left or right arrow keys will allow the programmer to rapidly view the devices at the previous or next address if installed If a detector such as a photoelectric detector with the selected address is not physically installed on the SLC or has a communication fault but the address is programmed in the system the following screen will be displayed TROUBL SMOKE PHOTO gt SHD T gt lt NOUN gt 10017 Edit Detector Screen 1 If the selected address has been added to programming and a detector such as a photoelectric detector with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and is
210. leted will be displayed DELETE MODULE MOCULE HHS IS DELETED 3 6 2 2 3 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module The programmer can change a modules existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in the Modules Screen The following screen will be displayed EDIT MODULE ENTER MODULE ADDRESS Edit Module Screen 76 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit module address such as 072 When the last digit is keyed in if the selected address has not been added to programming a screen showing information about a device that is installed with a lower address closest to the selected address will be displayed If no modules are installed on the loop the following screen will be displayed HO MODULE INSTALLED Edit Module Screen If the selected address has been added to programming but a module such as a monitor module with the selected address is not physically installed on the SLC or has a communication fault the following screen will be displayed TROUBL MONITOR SHD T7 NOLENS 1 12 If the selected address has been added to programming and a module such as a monitor module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and is communicating with the control panel the following screen will be displayed NORMAL MONITOR SADI gt
211. m Battery Size 7 Amp Hour Note Jumper JP5 on the FACP main circuit board must be removed to disable the FACP battery charger when using an external battery charger Communication Loop TB10 24 VDC nominal 27 6 VDC maximum Maximum length refer to Wire Requirements on page 205 Maximum loop current is 400 mA short circuit or 100 mA normal Maximum loop resistance is 40 ohms Supervised and power limited circuit Refer to SLC Loop manual for wiring information Notification Appliance Circuits TB3 amp TB4 Each Terminal Block provides connections for two Style Y Class B or one Style Z Class A for a total of Four Style Y Class B or two Style Z Class A NACs Style is configured using NACKEY card plugged into JP6 on main board Special Application full wave rectified power Power limited circuitry NAC wiring requirements refer to NAC Wiring on page 207 Nominal operating voltage 24 VDC Current limit fuseless electronic power limited circuitry Maximum signaling current per circuit 2 5 amps see Figure 1 1 on page 17 End of Line Resistor 4 7 V watt P N 71252 UL listed for Style Y Class B NAC Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices Two Programmable Relays and One Fixed Trouble Relay TB5 TB6 amp TB7 Contact rating 2 0 amps 30 VDC resistive 0 5 amps 30 VAC resistive Form C relays Refer to Figure 2 6 on page 50 for information on power limited relay circuit w
212. mary and Secondary from the FACP before installing 4XTMF 2 Cut jumper JP3 on the main circuit board to allow the control panel to supervise the 4 module 3 Carefully plug the connectors the AXTMF module into connectors J5 and J6 on the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board being careful not to bend any pins 4 Secure 4X TMF module to standoffs with supplied screws 5 Reapply power to the FACP 6 For proper 4XTMF operation the output relays must be programmed for the factory default settings Alarm Relay 1 Trouble Relay 2 and Supervisory Relay 3 7 When the installation has been complete enable the 4X TMF module by sliding the disconnect switch to the left 8 Test system for proper operation SLC SLC SLC SLC SHIELD acs TB10 At B A A B a ooooooQ TTT Standoff pu 1 ret oop 4XTMF ee jl LH 15 amp J6 Connectors J5 EXER Jc EES Cu Jumper JP3 E MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 5 JP3 CUT TO KISSOFF MONITOR AXIMF J7 PRI ACTIVE SEC ACTIVE Im 92udlsAxtm cdr FACP main circuit board PRLPHONELINE SEC PHONELINE Figure 2 16 4X TMF Connectors to MS 9200UDLS Connectors NOTE Jumper JP2 on the FACP main circuit board can be used to configure the FACP supervisory relay for operation with the 4XTMF module Relay 3 at TB5 must be p
213. mer to select the month that daylight savings time will end In this sub screen pressing will select September 2 will select October and 3 will select November Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen 2 will display two sub screens which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings time will end In the first sub screen pressing will select the first week 2 will select the second week and 3 will select the third week while in the second sub screen pressing 4 will select the fourth week and 5 will select the last week of the selected month 3 6 5 4 Timers Timer delays for PAS Pre signal and waterflow activation can be programmed by pressing while viewing System Setup Screen 2 The following screen will be displayed TIMERS 1 PHS DELAY Z2 PRE SIGNAL S WATERFLOW Timer Screen 1 TIMERS 1 AC LOSS DELAY Timer Screen 2 3 6 5 4 1 PAS Positive Alarm Sequence Delay The factory default setting for PAS is 000 for no delay To select a PAS delay of 001 to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for PAS press while viewing Timer Screen 1 The following display will appear PAS DELAY PAS Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display Enter a delay time consisting of three digits such as 005 for five seconds Upon entering the third digit the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return t
214. municating and whether or not it responds with the proper type identification The following screen will be displayed while verification is in progress Programming Screen 2 VERIFYING LOOPS FLEHSE WAIT Verification Progress Screen When Loop verification has been completed the display will indicate that the system is OK or if problems have been detected any device type programming errors Use the up and down arrow keys to view all detected errors MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 111 Programming 3 6 7 History The History option allows an authorized user to view or erase events which have 2 WBLKTEST occurred in the control panel Pressing while viewing Programming Screen 3 will S OPTION MODULES display the History options as shown in the following display PROGRAMMING 1 HISTORY Programming Screen 3 HISTORY 1 UIEM EVENTS 2 ERHSE HISTORY History Screen 3 6 7 1 View Events Pressing while viewing the History Screen will allow the user to select the events gt lt EROSE HISTORY to be viewed as illustrated in the following HISTORY 1 VIEW EVENTS History Screen H I T T E 1 ALL ALARMS S VIEW OTHER EVENTS View Events Screen While displaying the View Events screen press to view all events 2 to view only alarms or 3 to view other events Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through all of the displayed events 3 6 7 2 Erase History The Erase Histor
215. n Screen 2 ON BOARD DACT 1 FUTURE USE 2 CENTRAL STATION S SUPERU PHONE LINE On Board DACT Screen 2 Programming Report Style Pressing 3 while viewing Central Station Screen 2 will cause the Report Style display to toggle between Point and Zone Setting the Report Style to Point will program the DACT to report individual point status to the Central Station The control panel is capable of monitoring a total of 198 addressable devices Setting the Report Style to Zone will program the DACT to report zone Status to the Central Station The control panel is capable of monitoring a total of 99 individual zones Notes 1 Detector Address 01 will be reported to the Central Station as Point 01 Detector Address 02 as Point 02 with reports continuing in a similar fashion all the way up to Detector Address 99 which will be reported as Point 99 2 Module Address 01 will be reported to the Central Station as Point 160 Module Address 02 will be reported to the Central Station as Point 161 with reports continuing in a similar fashion all the way up to Module Address 99 which will be reported as Point 258 3 6 9 2 7 Supervised Phone Line The Supervised Phone Line feature allows the user to disable the supervision of Phone Line 2 by the DACT when using an alternate means of secondary transmission path The factory default setting is Phone Line 2 supervised Pressing 2 for Superv Phone Line while viewing Onboard DACT Screen 2 will c
216. n the preceding example the display indicates that the SLC Loop has 55 addressable detectors 35 monitor modules and 30 control modules installed Pressing the ESC key will return the display to Programming Screen 1 64 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 2 Point Program PROGRAMMING 1 AUTOPROGRAM The Point Program option allows the programmer to add a new addressable device to an 2 POINT PROGRAM SLC loop delete an existing device from a loop or change the programming for an S 70NE SETUP existing device Pressing 2 while viewing Programming Screen 1 will select the Point Program option and display the following screen Programming Screen 1 POINT PROGRAM SELECT 1 DETECTOR 2 MODULE Point Program Screen 3 6 2 1 Detector Programming Pressing 7 while viewing the Point Program Screen will allow the programmer to add delete or change the programming of an addressable detector The following screen will be displayed by the control panel DETECTOR 1 ADD 2 DELETE S EDIT Detector Screen 3 6 2 1 1 Add Detector Pressing 7 while viewing the Detector Screen will display the following screen which allows the programmer to add a new detector address to programming ADD DETECTOR ENTER DETECTOR see Add Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit detector address such as 005 When the last
217. nce any output circuit activated by a monitor module programmed as a waterflow type MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 97 Programming PROGRAMMING 1 LOOP SETUP 2 SYSTEM SETUP S VERIFY LOOP Programming Screen 2 See Page BANNER 1 FACTORY 2 USER DEFINED Banner Screen 98 Pressing 2 for System Setup while viewing Programming Screen 2 will cause the following screens to be displayed SYSTEM SETUP 1 1 TROUBLE REM OFF 2 BANNER S TIME DHTE System Setup Screen 1 SYSTEM SETUP 1 TIMERS 2 NAC S RELAYS System Setup Screen 2 SYSTEM SETUP 1 CANADIAN OPT OFF Z WATERFLOW SIL System Setup Screen 3 3 6 5 1 Trouble Reminder The Trouble Reminder features causes the control panel piezo to sound a reminder beep for alarms and troubles after the panel has been silenced Refer to System Setup on page 97 for a detailed description of this feature Pressing 7 while viewing System Setup Screen 1 will cause the display to toggle to Trouble Rem On which enables this feature Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Trouble Rem On and Trouble Rem Off 3 6 5 2 Banner The top line of the display which appears when the control panel is in normal mode can be changed by using the Banner option Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen 1 will cause the following to be displayed BANNER 1 FACTORY 2 USER DEFINED Banner Screen Pressing
218. nch circuit The branch circuit wire must run continuously without any disconnect devices from the power source to the control panel Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Codes as well as local codes Use 14 AWG 2 00 mm wire with 600 volt insulation for this branch circuit Use Table 7 1 to determine the total amount of current in AC amperes A that must be supplied to the system Table 7 1 AC Branch Circuit Requirements Number of Current Draw Total Current ds Devices AC amps per Device MS 9200UDLS Or MS 9200UDLSE mos X 3 cwm 1 X 239 fe NA JEMEN Branch Coren Regard _ MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 187 Power Supply Calculations 7 3 Calculating the System Current Draw 7 3 1 Overview The control panel must be able to power all internal and external devices continuously during the non fire alarm condition To calculate the non fire alarm load on the system power supply when primary power is applied use Calculation Column 1 in Table 7 3 on page 189 The control panel must support a larger load current during a fire alarm condition To calculate the fire alarm load on the power supply use Calculation Column 2 in Table 7 3 on page 189 The secondary power source batteries must be able to power the system during a primary power loss To calculate the non fire alarm load on t
219. nd Keltron Receiver Transmitter CAUTION For reasons of wiring diagram clarity terminal designations of Keltron modules are not shown in actual order Follow Keltron manual and module markings for exact terminal locations to prevent severe module damage IMPORTANT connections between the FACP and Keltron modules must be made within 20 feet and enclosed within conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical injury Keltron 95M3158 TTM RPS 1 Terminals 7 and 8 Remote station alarm trouble inputs 2 Terminals 9 and 10 Sprinkler supervisory input RING TELEPHONE LINE RING 2 KELTRON EARTH EARTH KELTRON 7 gt 95M3158 9 Js ES 193 95M3083 4 gt CENTRAL TTM RPS 4 4 TRM RP 9 Q gt STATION BINE ONE 50 5 Bib Editon Only 10 6 ue Se e el TO POWER SUPPY Note For more information refer to Keltron manual 24 VDC nonresettable power HEANAS 181 KAN 123 4 5 6 24V NONRST 24V RST NO NC C NO NC C NC NO C SUPV ALARM TRBL 4XTMF Module Note Cut TBL jumper on 4XTMF module to send alarm trouble signal from the same pair or terminals Fire Alarm Control Panel terminal blocks are not shown in their actual positions in order to clarify wiring connections 204 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 Wire Requirements APPENDIX E Wire Requirements T tapping of the SLC loop wiring is allowed for 2 wi
220. nd causing the FACP LCD to display an active HVAC OVRRIDE module and turn on the Supervisory LED Releasing the switch will allow the HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules to activate with subsequent alarms turning off the fans As an example pressing the HVAC OVRRIDE switch with no alarms in the system will prevent the fans from being turned off when an alarm does occur As long as the switch is activated the fans will not shutdown for any alarms If the system is still in alarm when the switch is released the fans will not shutdown unless another alarm occurs after the switch is released Important If an alarm exists in the system and HVAC Shutdown has already occurred HVAC OVRRIDE will have no effect on the HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules HVAC OVRRIDE will Note Activation of the HVAC OVRRIDE module causes a supervisory event that will be communicated to the Central Station if enabled MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 209 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions APPENDIX G Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions This appendix describes the various Event Codes and their messages which are available for the Ademco Contact ID Format G 1 Transmission Format Between DACT and Receiver The transmission string for the Ademco Contact ID Format is as follows SSSS 18 QXYZ GG CCC where SSSS Four digit Subscriber ID Account Code 18 Identifies transmission as Contact ID to the receiver at the Central Station Q Event
221. ne 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17 Zone 18 Zone 19 Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory Supervisory The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Zone Ranges 20 29 30 39 40 40 50 59 60 69 70 79 80 89 and 90 99 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN LED module MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 125 Programming 126 ANN LED Point Option Alarm Only for use with ANN RLED module If Point is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms only the first ten LEDs on the first ANN LED module will display the system status information The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on each additional module will display the active alarm status of each point in the Point Range programmed for that particular module The points that will be annunciated on a particular ANN LED module depend on the programming options selected as far as which SLC loop and the device type detector or module to be annunciated The LED assignments for each ANN LED module will be as follows ANN RLED Module 1 Point Range 01 30 Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault NAC 3 Fault NAC 4 Fault Battery Fault Fault Charger Fault Fault Disabled Maintenance 01 02 03 WEN 04 05 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 06 Point 07 Point 08 Point 09 P
222. ne card the message was transmitted to 2 Q which is the Event Qualifier for the reporting structure is printed out in the report as an E for New Event or R for New Restore 210 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions EVENT CODE CLASSIFICATIONS 100 200 300 400 500 600 ALARMS SUPERVISORY TROUBLES OPEN CLOSE DISABLES TEST REMOTE ACCESS BYPASSES MISC MedicalFire Fire System Sounder Open Close Remote System Sounder Test Panic Relay System Access Access Relay System Burglary Peripheral Control Peripheral General 24 Communication Communication Hour Protective Loop Sensor EVENT MESSAGE Medical Alarms 100 100 Medical EMERG Personal Emergency 101 Pendant transmitter EMERG Personal Emergency 102 Fail to report in EMERG Fail to Check in Fire Alarms 110 110 Fire Alarm FIRE Fire Alarm 111 Smoke FIRE Smoke Detector 112 Combustion FIRE Combustion 113 Waterflow FIRE Waterflow 114 Heat FIRE Heat Sensor 115 Pull station FIRE Pull Station 116 Duct FIRE Duct Sensor 117 Flame FIRE Flame Sensor 118 Near Alarm FIRE Near Alarm Panic Alarms 120 120 Panic Alarm PANIC Panic 121 Duress PANIC Duress 122 Silent PANIC Silent Panic 123 Audible PANIC Audible Panic Burglar Alarms 130 130 Burglary BURG Burglary 131 Perimeter BURG Perimeter 132 Interior BURG Interior
223. nes disconnecting any premises phones e Off On Hook performs on and off hook status to the phone lines Listen for dial tone 440 Hz tone typical in most networks e Dialing the Central Station s number default is Touch Tone programmable to rotary e For tone burst or touchtone type formats discern proper Ack and Kissoff tone s The frequency and time duration of the tone s varies with the transmission format The control panel will adjust accordingly Communicate in the following formats V Ademco Contact ID V SIA DCS 8 V SIA DCS 20 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 19 Product Description 1 6 Components Main Circuit Board The main circuit board contains the system s CPU power supply other primary components and wiring interface connectors The 4AXTMF option module plugs in and is mounted to the main circuit board See Page Cabinet The MS 9200UDLS backbox provides space for two batteries up to 18 Amp Hour Ample knockouts are provided for system wiring Also available is an optional dress panel DP 9692 which mounts to the inside of the cabinet required by ULC for Canadian installations Transformer Assembly Optional One 100VA transformer is provided standard XRM 24B E with the panel 3 6 amps maximum An optional 100 VA transformer XRM 24B XRM 24BE for the MS 9200UDLSE is Standard 24 available to provide maximum system and accessory power 6 6 amp total Note t
224. ng annunciators 117 see also device addressing 97 see also module or detector addressing 20 Ademco Contact ID format 210 Adjective control module 89 list 72 monitor module 82 multiple entries 74 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 AEM 16ATF Annunciator 41 AEM 32AF Annunciator 41 Alarm 160 Alarm Silence 18 156 alarm verification 15 69 163 166 ANN LED 39 ANN LED Annunciator Module 38 annunciator 24 ACM 15 117 ACM 8RF 15 LCD 80F 15 LDM Graphic 15 annunciator addressing 117 annunciator graphic see also LDM Series 41 annunciator remote see also LCD 80F 41 Automatic Test Operation 163 Autoprogramming 15 60 64 Autosilence 15 166 NAC 107 auxiliary DC power 49 B backbox 20 see also cabinet 48 Backup Reporting 134 Banner 97 setting 98 battery 20 cable connection 49 charger 19 charger capacity 16 Charging Circuit 16 see also secondary power 16 49 battery box 22 battery charger 23 disable 16 external 23 baud rate 142 BB 55F see also battery box 20 22 C cabinet dimensions 47 48 cabinet mounting 45 Calculate System Current Draw 188 Calculating the Battery Size 190 Canadian Applications 44 Canadian Option 97 111 217 Central Station 133 186 account code 136 communications 181 phone number 137 Phone Numbers 135 point assignments 215 report style 141 Central Station Reports 215 CHG 120F see also battery charger 23 see also remote battery charger 16 CHG 75 see also battery ch
225. ng Central Station Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed TROUBLE CALL LIMIT dH 99 RANGE Backup Reporting Screen Enter a value between 00 and 99 then press Enter to set the Call Limit to this value Note Entering a value of 00 will disable the Trouble Call Limit allowing the DACT to call the Central Station an unlimited number of times MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 9 2 6 1 Central Station Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers CENTRAL STATION Pressing for Primary or 2 for Secondary will display the following screens 1 PRIMARY 2 GECONDDRV Note that the following information must be entered for both the Primary and 3 REPORT STYLE Secondary Central Station Phone Numbers Central Station Screen 2 CEMTEEHL STATION i 1 TEST TIME INT 24 Z2 HCCOUMT CODE mana S 24HR TST TIME 8021 Primary Secondary Screen 1 CENTRAL STATION 1 PHONE NUMBER Primary Secondary Screen 2 CENTRAL STATION 1 COMM FORMAT HDEMCO CONTHCT ID Primary Secondary Screen 3 CENTRAL STATION 1 EUEHT CODES Primary Secondary Screen 4 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 135 Programming Test Time Interval CENTRAL STATION Pressing while viewing Primary Secondary Screen 1 will cause the following screens to be 1 TEST TIME INT displayed 2 ACCOUNT CODE S 24HR TST TIME Primary Secondary Screen 1 TEST TIME INTERVAL 1 24 HOURS 2 12 HOURS 35 8 HOURS Test Time Interval
226. not require a password The control panel will continue to provide fire protection while in Read Status mode This mode can be entered while the control panel is in alarm or trouble If a new alarm or trouble occurs during these functions the Read Status is exited to prevent confusion Read Status Entry When the operator presses the control panel Enter key the LCD will display the following 1 REHD STATUS MODE 2 PROGRAMMING MODE S REMOTE DOWNLOAD Pressing while this screen is being displayed will cause the control panel to enter the Read Status mode which allows the user to view and print the programmed features and status of the control panel The following screens will be displayed READ STATUS READ STATUS 1 SY STEM POINT 1 ZHHHURNC IHTORS 2 Z0NES LINE 5 POWER S CENTRAL STATION Read Status Screen 1 Read Status Screen 4 READ STATUS li READ STATUS 1 TROUBLE REMINDER 1 SERVICE TERMINAL 2zTIMERS 2 PRIHTER PFC S NACS 3 PRINT Read Status Screen 2 Read Status Screen 5 READ STATUS READ STATUS 1 ZEELR S 1 TIME DHTE 2 PROGRAM CHECK S HISTORY Read Status Screen 3 Read Status Screen 6 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions 4 22 1 System Point READ STATUS 1 SYSTEM POINT Pressing while viewing Read Status Screen 1 will cause the following screen to be 2 7 MES displayed 3 POWER Read Status Screen 1 READ SYSTEM POINT SELECT TYFE 1 DET
227. ns while viewing the Annunciator Screen allows the operator to view the ACS Options screen ACS OPTIONS ACS ENABLED 2 HCS HDDEESSES UDHCT ENABLED ACS Options Screen The ACS Options screen indicates if the ACS option has been enabled YES or disabled NO Pressing 2 for ACS Addresses while viewing the ACS Options screen will display screens with ACS addresses 1 31 and whether a device is installed at that address YES or not installed NO The ACS Options screen indicates if a UDACT is installed YES or if a UDACT is not installed NO Pressing 3 for ANN BUS Options while viewing the Annunciator Screen will display the following screens HhHPh BUS ENABLED NO 2 MOBDULES INSTALLED S ANN S PG OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 1 HHPh BUS 1 HhhHN 88 OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 2 The ANN BUS Screen 1 indicates if the ANN BUS has been enabled YES or disabled NO Pressing 2 for Modules Installed while viewing ANN BUS Screen 1 will display screens for ANN BUS Addresses 1 8 and the devices installed at each address Subscreen will display the options that have been programmed for each device Pressing 3 for ANN S PG Options while viewing ANN BUS Screen 1 will display the options selected for the installed serial or parallel printer Pressing for ANN 60 Options while viewing ANN BUS Screen 2 will display the options selected for the installed ANN 80 annunciators 01 27 09 175 Operating Instructions 4 22 11 Phone Line
228. o 1 44 ft If the addressable smoke detector s Chamber reading is not within the acceptable range clean the detector and check the Chamber value again If the reading 1s still not within the acceptable range immediately replace the detector 178 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions Drift Compensation Drift compensation uses software algorithms that identify and compensate for long term changes in the data readings from each addressable smoke detector These long term changes in detector data readings are typically caused by dirt and dust accumulation inside the smoke chamber Drift compensation performs the following functions e Samples photoelectric smoke detectors every 6 seconds and ionization smoke detectors every 3 seconds Allows a smoke detector to retain its original ability to detect actual smoke and resist false alarms even as dirt and dust accumulate Reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the control panel to automatically perform the periodic sensitivity measurements required by NFPA Standard 72 The FACP software also provides filters to remove transient noise signals usually caused by electrical interference Maintenance Alert The software determines when the drift compensation for a detector reaches an unacceptable level that can compromise detector performance When a detector reaches an unacceptable level the control panel indicates a maintenance alert Table 4 summarize
229. o Indicators 18 Supervisory 157 Trouble 157 LED annunciator 41 Local Energy Municipal Box Service 56 Local Programming 60 Loop Setup 96 M Maintenance Alert 15 163 levels 179 maintenance alert 179 Maintenance Program Level 2 61 147 Manual programming 60 Master Program Level 1 61 63 Medical Alert 162 Mode key 62 Module add 75 addressing 20 delete 76 219 edit monitor 76 enable disable 79 see also addressable modules 20 Module Programming 75 Monitor module 20 adjective 82 enable disable 79 noun 83 noun adjective 81 type 79 type action 80 Type list 79 type selection 80 Mounting cabinet 45 main circuit board 45 municipal box transmitter see also 4XTMF module 56 N NAC 16 19 104 106 162 Auto Silence 107 coded 164 coding 107 current 16 End of Line Resistor 16 power 14 see also Notification Appliance Circuit 14 50 silence inhibit 109 silenceable 106 Style configuration 51 Style Y wiring diagram 51 synchronized 164 type codes 106 voltage drop 16 voltage operating 16 wiring Style 50 NAC enable disable 105 NAC options 97 NACKEY card 51 N ELR Mounting Plate 21 NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System 198 199 NFPA 72 Central Station Service Protected Premises Unit or Remote Station Service 198 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System 198 NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Sys tems 201 NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling 220 Index System 200 NFPA Battery Requirements
230. o connection N Figure 1 9 ANN I O Board Layout annI Oleds cdr 1 8 7 6 ANN LED Annunciator Module The ANN LED and ANN RLED annunciator modules provide LED annunciation of general system faults and input zones points when used with a compatible FACP The ANN LED module provides alarm red trouble yellow and supervisory yellow indication for up to ten input zones or addressable points The ANN LEDR provides alarm red indication for up to 30 input zones or addressable points Multiple ANN R LED modules may be used for full system coverage MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 35 Product Description 1 8 7 6 1 ANN LED Board Layout Figure 1 10 illustrates the ANN LED board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN BUS ID number ANN BUS ID 6 6 Address DIP switch o o HTTP o 00 z N L HH ANN BUS AB En i ANN BUS Connector Figure 1 10 ANN LED Board Layout 1 8 7 6 2 Specifications e Max ANN BUS Voltage 24 VDC e Max Current V Alarm 68 mA V Standby 28 mA e Operating Temperature 32 to 120 0 C to 49 C e For indoor use in a dry location only 1 8 7 6 3 Mounting Installation The ANN LED Module is supplied mounted to the DP 9692LED Dress Panel Install the dress panel as described in the documentation supplied with the DP 9692LED 36 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E
231. o move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character To enter a space press the QZ key four times to place a blank in the desired position When all characters have been entered press the Enter key to store the information The display will return to the Banner Screen 01 27 09 99 Programming SYSTEM SETUP 3 6 5 3 Time Date 1 TROUBLE REM The control panel time and date can be changed by pressing 3 while viewing the 2 BANNER System Setup Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed 3 TIME DATE System Setup Screen 1 TIME AND DATE 1 TIME 16 68 AM 2 DHTE 4 87 2 06 S CLOCK FORMAT 12HR Time Date Screen 1 TIME AND DATE 1 1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Time Date Screen 2 3 6 5 3 1 Time To change the time press while viewing the Time Date Screen The following screen will be displayed ENTER TIME Time Screen A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display Below the cursor is the current time To change the time enter the two digit hours followed by the two digit minutes The cursor will move one position to the right each time a digit is entered After the last minutes digit is entered the cursor will again move one position to the right At this point enter for AM or 2 for PM The display will then return to the Time Date Screen which will show the new time entry If an error is made while entering a digit press the CLR key to delete the ent
232. o software zones 4 10 NAC Operation There are four Style Y Class B or two Style Z Class A programmable NACs Notification Appliance Circuits resident on the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board All NACs may be programmed as silenceable or nonsilenceable and may also be programmed for steady or coded operation Coded operation provides a choice between March Time Temporal or California coding 162 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions 4 11 Programmed Zone Operation Each addressable detector and monitor module can be assigned to a maximum of five software alarm zones A general alarm zone Z00 may be listed for output control points but it is not necessary to list Z00 for input points since this is the default zone for all alarm input devices Zone 700 is not activated by supervisory points When an input device alarms and is not disabled it activates all software zones assigned to it An output device that is not disabled is turned on when any of the software zones to which it is programmed become active Only alarms hazards tornado alerts can turn on any of the four main 4 12 Disable Enable Operation Input points which are disabled do not cause an alarm or any zone activation Disabled output points are held in the off state AII disabled points are treated as if they were in trouble with the exception being the status label that will be displayed is DISABL 4 13 Waterflow Circuits Operation If an
233. o the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 5 4 2 Pre signal Delay The factory default setting for Pre signal delay is 000 for no delay To select a Pre signal delay of 001 to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for Pre signal press 2 while viewing Timer Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed PRESIGNAL DELAY Pre signal Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display Enter a delay time consisting of three digits such as 009 for nine seconds Upon entering the third digit the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time Note that the FACP allows programming for PAS and Pre signal timers but a detector can only be programmed for either PAS or Pre signal operation Refer to Edit Detector on page 66 for programming details TIMER 3 6 5 4 3 Waterflow Delay cee MEE A delay can be added prior to declaring a waterflow type of alarm Be careful to include any built in delays of the waterflow device The factory default setting for Waterflow delay is OOO for no delay To select a Waterflow delay of 01 to 90 seconds for all devices programmed for Waterflow delay press 3 while viewing Timer Screen 1 The following screen will be displayed 2 PRE SIGNAL S WATERFLOW Timer Screen 1 WATERFLOW DELAY RA
234. o transformer mounting slot lt q Mounting Slot gt XRM 24B E will remain securely in place after bottom S flange has been J seated Figure 2 2 MS 9200UDLS Main Board Chassis Installation 46 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 Installation 3 37 cm 5 1 cm 3 37 cm 1 3255 2 00 4 2 00 yi4 2 90 94 2 00 4 2 00 14 2 00 14 2 00 1 325 A 1 625 C Semi Flush Mounting Do not recess box more than 3 875 into wall to avoid covering venting Hinge Slot for optional Dress Panel holes on top of box 4 13 16 65 42 29 625 2 325 5 91 cm ze p 46 25 4 i 12 00 30 48 1 6254 A 4 1cm i 626 Io ha i 6 0 12 13 q 1 15 24 cm l x d 48 37 Qcm 119 0 17 83cm 702 i e e 4 45 E 45 Mounting a 4 75 slots fot v optional Le A Trim Ring ind zie fm e node bg lr Semi flush mountihg hole le 2 00 gt 16 00 40 64 1
235. oe UR 33 ANN IO Board Tay OUC scenon coat dioe oa ie date cm etie Ede 33 jS SI DE 33 ANN V Q Connection tO Ee ee 34 ANNE Module LED WINNE 34 ANN LED Annunciator Mod le 35 ANNGELED Board Layout 36 SPECI CAORS 36 Mou ntine InstallattOli cab 36 ANN LED oBnectloH fO sages 37 ANN RLEY Amnunciator Module eee 38 ANN REY Board Layo 38 SPCCINCALIONS etree 38 Moun iis Insta lation HU 38 ANN RE Y Connection to PACP ee 39 AININ BUS Audio Panel Control oer ooo Rer Det rite cate 39 Legacy ACS Series LED Zone Type Annunciators ocean tines uad lean tede 4 GUN SUG dovuta ieu LE 41 MS 9200UDLS P N 52750 E1 01 27 09 Telephone Requirements and in Eb OO pM mE 42 Telephone 42 rei tal COMMU MIC ALOR 42 Telephone Company Rights and Warn
236. ogram settings when the detector with address 005 is activated zone Z97 will cause its associated control module to activate immediately sounding the connected PAS signaling device Following the PAS delay time zone Z001 will cause its associated control module to activate and the control panel will initiate an alarm condition Note that a detector can be enabled for either PAS or Pre signal but not both Pre signal The Pre signal option programs the detector to delay panel activation for a preprogrammed time delay of up to three minutes while allowing for visual verification by a person Note that the alarm relay and communicator will respond to the initial alarm immediately In addition Zone 98 will activate This zone can be programmed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or indicator which the installer designates as a Presignal indication do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose To enable the Pre signal feature press 5 while viewing Edit Detector Screen 3 until the display reads Pre signal Yes Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre signal Yes and Pre signal No Refer to Presignal on page 164 For example if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for Pre Signal operation V Select Pre signal Yes when editing the detector set to address 005 V Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this detector in this example Z001 V Program an
237. oint 10 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 12 Point 13 Point 14 Point 15 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 16 Point 17 Point 18 Point 19 Point 20 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 21 Point 22 Point 23 Point 24 Point 25 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 26 Point 27 Point 28 Point 29 Point 30 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm ANN RLED Module 2 Point Range 31 60 Point 32 Point 33 Point 34 Point 35 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 36 Point 37 Point 38 Point 39 Point 40 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 42 Point 43 Point 44 Point 45 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 47 Point 48 Point 49 Point 50 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 51 Point 52 Point 53 Point 64 Point 55 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Point 56 Point 57 Point 58 Point 59 Point 60 Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm Active Alarm The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Point Ranges 61 90 and 91 99 will follow the same pattern as the second ANN RLED module MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming ANN LED Point Option Alarm Trouble and Supervisory If Point is sel
238. ommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspections authority or electrician The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface the termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the REN of all devices does not exceed I DOC Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Representative NOTIFIER FIRE LITE CANADA 10 Whitmore Road Woodbridge Ontario LAL 77 Phone 905 856 8733 FAX 905 856 9687 IC Certificate Number Ringer Equivalence Number REN 1 3B Load Number 2 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 SECTION 2 Installation Installation The cabinet may be either semi flush or surface mounted The cabinet mounts using two key slots and two 0 250
239. ontact ID amp SIA Formats The information shown in Table 3 3 is automatically programmed for the Central Station phone number Event Codes when the Ademco Contact ID or SIA Format is selected Enter Os for an Event Code Setting to disable the report Disabled reports will not get called to the Central Station The programmer may enable the Event Types in programming as described on the previous page Table 3 3 Event Codes Event Description Ademco Contact ID Active a a oe PULL STATION __ LWATERFLON 18 34 88 SMOKE PHOTO Mmo FA FH DETUSERDEF mMm FA FH SMOKEN Mmo FA FH DETUSERDEF2 ii FA mMm HEATDETECT O 4 KA KH DETUSERDEF3 m KA KH SMOKEDUCTFP li DETUSERDEF4 mo m FH PHOTO WHEAT O 1H DETUSERDEFS DUCT SUPERVISORY 30 I5 HN CPHOTOSUPERY 1 389 8 mH PHOTO ADAPT FA Hr DETUSERDEFS M mM FH PHOTOBEAM mM TA mMm sued a gt 9 mows Q0 _ mows Q0 _ Cmtued Q0 Q0 mows Q0 mtued o QW 0 Q0 mows Q0 Cmtued Q0 Q0 mouse o 0 not used o o Y MONITOR FA MON USER DEF33 Lmtued O Q0
240. ot be used if new ANN BUS annunciators are being used due to incompatible serial communication protocols A variety of optional devices can be connected to the FACP ANN BUS communication circuit ANN Series devices can be connected to the ACS EIA 485 terminals on TB 9 Compatible devices include the following e ANN 80 LCD Annunciator e ANN S PG Serial Parallel Printer Interface Module e ANN I O LED Driver Module e ANN LED Annunciator Module alarm trouble supervisory LEDs e ANN RLED Annunciator Module red alarm LEDs only e ANN RLY Relay Module 1 8 7 1 ANN BUS Wiring This section contains information on calculating ANN BUS wire distances and the types of wiring configurations Class B 1 8 7 1 1 Calculating Wiring Distance for ANN BUS Modules The following instructions will guide the installer in determining the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance that can be used with FACP ANN BUS accessory modules To calculate the wire gauge that must be used to connect ANN BUS modules to the FACP it is necessary to calculate the total worst case current draw for all modules on a single 4 conductor bus The total worst case current draw is calculated by adding the individual worst case currents for each module The individual worst case values are shown in the following table Model Number Worst Case Current Draw ANN 80 LCD Annunciator 0 040 amps ANN S PG Serial Parallel Printer Interface Module 0 040 amps ANN I O LED Driver
241. output such as a control module that is to be activated by detector 005 by assigning the same zone to it in this example Z001 V Program an output such as a control module for Pre signal activation by assigning zone Z98 to it This control module may be connected to a signaling device used to indicate a Pre signal condition do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming V Enable zones Z001 and Special Purpose Zone Pre signal 98 and set the Pre signal delay timer to some value With the preceding program settings when the detector with address 005 is activated zone Z98 will cause its associated control module to activate immediately sounding the connected signaling device to indicate the Pre signal condition Following the Pre signal delay time zone Z001 will cause its associated control module to activate and the control panel will initiate an alarm condition Note that a detector can be enabled for either PAS or Pre signal but not both Zone Assignment EDIT DETECTOR A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable detector 1 20 ASSIGNMENT Pressing while viewing Edit Detector Screen 4 displays the following screen Bg t 20 ASSIGNMENT 266 kk 2 2 Zur Edit Detector Screen 4 Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z represents the Zone Number s corresponding to this device The factory default for an unprogrammed device is
242. ows The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field Press the zero key twice to display FLR 3 2 With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field press the zero key twice to recall the display ROOM 304 The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field 3 With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305 4 Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field 5 Select a zone number from 00 to 99 700 default zone is the general alarm zone Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones 3 6 2 2 4 Edit Module Screen for Control Modules The programmer can change a module s existing or factory default programming by MODULES pressing 3 in the Modules Screen The following screen will be displayed 1 ADD 2 DELETE S EDIT Modules Screen ENTER MODULE ADDRESS EDIT MODULE er Edit Module Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left The programmer keys in the three digit module address such as 002 When the last digit is keyed in if the selected address corresponds to a control module a screen displaying information about the control module with the selected address will be displayed as illustrated in the following NORMAL CONTROL SADI gt NOLENS Sh IMB Edit Control Screen 1 In the preceding example V Normal indicates that the
243. panel programming history logs detector status etc is possible without enabling the remote download option CAUTION After successfully downloading a program make certain to perform the following steps 1 Print out all programmed data via Print Mode or manually view programmed entries and compare to intended program data 2 Test all affected panel operations 3 Immediately correct any problems found 6 1 Remote Download 184 72 requirements state that a technician be on site and at the control panel whenever the PK Plus Programming Utility is used to download any information to the FACP This applies to local and remote programming For this reason a new option has been added to the FACP which allows an individual at the FACP to enter a password and either enable the proprietary mode where downloading will be allowed at any time or access a specific password protected screen where downloading will be allowed regardless of the current proprietary setting The Remote Download option can be selected from the main menu screen as shown below 1 REHD STATUS MODE 2 PROGRAMMING MODE S REMOTE DOWNLOAD Pressing 3 for Remote Download while viewing the main menu will cause the following screen to be displayed REMOTE DOWNLOAD ENTER PASSWORD MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Remote Site Upload Download The Remote Download password default 00000 must be entered to access the Remote Download feature Note
244. peration will initiate the following events e The piezo sounder pulses 1 2 second On l second Off The LCD displays a hazard message along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date Communicate the hazard condition to the Central Station e Relays programmed for hazard will be activated e The alarm relay is not activated e NACSs will not activate e Silenced alarms are not resounded e Timers are not started e Store event in history buffer e Supervisory LED flashes 2 second On 1 2 second Off Hazard Tornado Condition must be Acknowledged before FACP can be reset Hazard conditions latch They can be assigned to software zones 4 9 Medical Alert Condition Operation Medical Alert Condition operation will initiate the following events e piezo sounder 2 second On 2 second Off The LCD displays a medical alert message along with the device name type address adjective noun associated zones and time date e Communicate the medical alert condition to the Central Station e Relays programmed for medical alert will be activated e The alarm relay is not activated e NACS will not activate e Silenced alarms are not resounded e Timers are not started e Store event in history buffer e Supervisory LED flashes 1 2 second On 1 2 second Off e Medical Alert condition must be Acknowledged before FACP can be reset Medical Alert conditions latch They can be assigned t
245. pervisory AR Trouble Comm Fail Process Mon Process Mon AR AC Loss Hazard Medical Silenceable Alarm Zone Active XX 3 6 9 1 3 3 Auto Configure The ANN BUS Auto Configure features allows the programmer to quickly bring all installed ANN BUS modules online The software will search for all ANN BUS modules and automatically program the device type and address into the system For the Auto Configure to work the ANN BUS must be enabled the annunciators must be connected powered and a unique address must be set on each annunciator Pressing 3 while viewing ANN BUS Screen 1 will begin the Auto Configure process and cause the following screen to be displayed ANN BUS HUTO CONGF IGURE IH PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT Auto Configure Screen MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 6 9 1 3 4 ANN S PG Print Options ANN BUS The Print option allows the programmer to configure the optional printer Pressing 1 ANN S PG OPTIONS 1 while viewing ANN BUS screen 2 will display the following screens 2 HMH 88 OPTIONS ANN BUS Screen 2 HHH S PG OPTIONS 1 PORT PAR 2 PRINTER SUPU HO S OFFLINE TIMER 66 ANN S PG Options Screen 1 HHH S PG OPTIONS li 1 BHUD RATE H A 2 DHTH BITS H A 3 PARITY H A ANN S PG Options Screen 2 hHM S PG OPTIONS 1 5TOP BITS N A ANN S PG Options Screen 3 Pressing for Port while viewing ANN S PG Options screen 1 will allow the programmer to select between a Parallel
246. printer and history file It also performs a lamp test by turning on all LEDs except the Ground LED piezo sounder and LCD display segments after the Reset key is released Any alarm or trouble that exists after a reset will resound the system 156 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions 4 2 LED Indicators The nine LED indicators which are located on the front panel operate as follows AC Power This is a green LED which illuminates if AC power is applied to the FACP A loss of AC power will turn off this LED Fire Alarm This red LED flashes when one or more alarms occur It illuminates steady when the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed The Fire Alarm LED turns off when the Reset key is pressed The LED will remain off if all alarms have been cleared Supervisory This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more supervisory conditions occur such as a sprinkler valve tamper condition It illuminates steady when the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed It turns off when the Reset key is pressed and remains off if all supervisory alarms have been cleared Trouble This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more trouble conditions occur It stays on steady when the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed The LED turns off when all trouble conditions are cleared This LED will also illuminate if the microprocessor watchdog circuit is activated Maintenance This is a yellow LED
247. quirements for FACP Max CLASS B CLASS A allowable Max allowable wire pair length Max allowable wire pair length total loop feet feet Amps ohms solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid ts e w z7 e es ae e Notes Calculations are based on Direct Current Resistance data for uncoated copper wire per National Electrical Code 2005 Edition Table 8 Conductor Properties MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 207 HVAC Control APPENDIX F HVAC Control The FACP can be programmed to shut down a building s HVAC fans in the event of a fire The fans cannot be restarted until the fire alarm condition has been cleared and the FACP has been reset to a normal non alarm condition IMPORTANT This HVAC feature is not to be used for smoke control It is only designed to shut down fans during a fire alarm condition F 1 Control Module Operation F 1 1 HVAC SHUTDN The HVAC SHUTDN type code can be assigned to any addressable control relay module for the purpose of shutting down HVAC fans during a fire alarm condition Devices connected to a module with this type code are unsupervised To program this feature in the FACP e Program the HVAC SHUTDN type code to the control module which will be used to shut down the fans refer to Type under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 85 Program the control module to a software zone and program alarm input devices which when activa
248. r is near but below the allowed alarm limit and is in need of maintenance before the performance is compromised DIRTY2 maintenance alert indicating that a detector needs immediate maintenance since it has been within 80 of its alarm threshold for 24 hours J INVREP maintenance alert indicating a hardware problem in the detector TEST indicating a detector has failed the automatic test operation which functionally checks its sensing chamber and electronics J INV ID indicating that an incorrect device code Type ID has been g programmed for an installed device for example Photo has been programmed but an Ion detector has been installed J SW TBL indicating a module has failed the testing of its Class A switching relay e Fourth line in display V Time the current time in this example is 0 00A which represents 10 00 AM vV Date the current month day and year in this example is 07 for January 08 for the 8th day of the month and 07 for the year 2001 V Device Address 2001 in this example represents SLC Loop D represents a detector and 001 represents device address 001 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 159 Operating Instructions Pressing the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key will cause the pulsing piezo to silence and the system Trouble LED to change from flashing to on steady This block acknowledgment occurs regardless of the number of troubles alarms and supervisory events active in the system
249. r the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device The cursor moves to the next Z designation Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones ZOO When all desired changes have been made press the Enter key to store the zone assignments The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen 4 EDIT MONITOR Noun Adjective 1 NOUN ADJECT IVE The Noun Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the monitor module currently being programmed Pressing while viewing Edit Monitor Screen 5 will cause the following screen to be displayed Z DESCEIPTIOM Edit Monitor Screen 5 1 STHHDHED ADJECTIVE 2 STANDARD NOUN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Noun Adjective Screen MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 81 Programming 1 STRHPRRD BPJECTIUE Pressing while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following 2 5THHDRHRD NOUN S CUSTOM ADJECTIVE to see all the Adjective screens Press the number corresponding to the adjective 4 CUSTOM NOUN 82 Noun Adjective Screen lt 1 NORTH 2 SO0UTH S EHST 1 5 li 2 FRONT 3 CENTER screen s to be displayed Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the monitor module currently being programmed 1 3RD
250. ral Disables 530 and 540 Communication Disables 550 and 560 55 Dialer disabled DISABLE Dialer Disable 552 Radio transmitter disabled DISABLE Radio Disable Bypasses 570 570 Zone bypass BYPASS Zone Bypass 571 Fire bypass BYPASS Fire Bypass 572 24 Hour zone bypass BYPASS 24 Hour Bypass 573 Burglar bypass BYPASS Burg Bypass 574 Group bypass BYPASS Group Bypass Test Misc 600 601 Manual trigger test TEST Manually Triggered restore not applicable 602 Periodic test report TEST Periodic restore not applicable 603 Periodic RF transmission TEST Periodic Radio restore not applicable 604 Fire test TEST Fire Test restore not used 605 Status report to follow STATUS Status Follows restore not applicable 606 Listen in to follow LISTEN Listen in Active restore not applicable 607 Walk test mode TEST Walk Test Mode 608 System abnormal test TEST System Abnormal Test MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 APPENDIX H Central Station Points Central Station Points The control panel transmits Central Station Reports in a numerical format which indicates the FACP addressable device address that is reporting The following table indicates the Central Station Report CS Report number that will be transmitted and the addressable device address it represents Table H 1 Addressable DETECTORS Report Address Report Address Report Address Report Address 9 we NNNM
251. re Style 4 configurations The total resistance of any branch cannot exceed 40 ohms The total wire length of all branches cannot exceed 10 000 feet 3 000 m Connecting external system accessories to the MS 9200UDLS main circuits must be carefully considered to ensure proper operation It is important to use the correct type of wire gauge and run length for each MS 9200UDLS circuit Reference the chart below to specify wire requirements and limitations for each MS 9200UDLS circuit Note 1 Ifthe SLC loop is to be run in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits the risk of encountering problems can be greatly reduced by exclusively employing electronic sounders instead of more electronically noisy notification appliances such as electromechanical bells or horns 2 The SLC can be programmed to operate in LiteSpeed mode factory default setting for a quicker device response time While shielded wire is not required in LiteSpeed mode it is recommended that all SLC wiring be twisted pair to minimize the effects of electrical interference Use the following table to determine the specific wiring requirements for the SLC when unshielded wire is used Refer Table E 1 on page 206 and Table E 2 on page 207 for wiring requirements MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 205 Wire Requirements Table E 1 FACP Wire Specifications CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS WIRE REQUIREMENTS Circuit Type Circuit Function SLC loop power limited Connects to
252. re by the receiver manufacturers may affect the receiver compatibility with the FACP DACT After completing the installation communication between the DACT and Central Station Receiver must be tested and verified MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 183 Remote Site Upload Download SECTION 6 Remote Site Upload Download Important The FACP will automatically reset 2 minutes after completion of a user program download via the PS Tools programming utility To prevent program corruption the operator must wait until this panel reset occurs before performing any panel operations The control panel may be programmed or interrogated off site via the public switched telephone network or locally using a USB cable Any personal computer with Windows or NEWER with a 2400 baud compatible modem and Upload Download software PS Tools may serve as a Service Terminal This allows download of the entire program or upload of the entire program history file walktest data current status system voltages time and date The control panel may also communicate to a local PC at the job site The PC must be connected to the USB connector J12 on the FACP main circuit board A standard USB cable with male A to male B connectors which must be purchased separately is required Important Remote modification of FACP programming requires that the panel be enabled for remote download refer to Remote Site Upload Download on page 184 Remote interrogation of
253. refers to the SLC loop mode of operation Refer to Wire Requirements on page 205 for wire specifications based upon SLC protocol There are two Loop Protocols available CLIP Classic Loop Interface Protocol which is used for the older legacy addressable devices such as the M300 Series modules and detectors e LiteSpeed factory default setting used for the 350 Series or newer addressable devices for quicker response times Note that the legacy devices can operate only in CLIP mode while the newer devices are compatible with CLIP and LiteSpeed modes of operation Pressing 2 while viewing the Loop Setup Screen will toggle between CLIP and LiteSpeed Protocols Device Addressing It is important to note that the MS 9200UDLS addressable device capacity is 99 detectors and 99 control monitor modules Newer devices can be set to addresses higher than 99 but these addresses will not function with the MS 9200UDLS Note that It is permissible to mix old and new devices on the same loop but the FACP must be set for CLIP mode when older devices are installed 3 6 5 System Setup System Setup allows the programmer to configure the following control panel features Trouble Reminder This feature when enabled provides an audible reminder that an alarm or trouble still exists on the FACP after the control panel has been silenced The control panel piezo sounder will pulse once every 15 seconds during an alarm and every two minutes during a
254. ressing the Drill key will restart the timer Autosilence operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction 4 20 3 Trouble Reminder If selected this feature causes a reminding beep every 15 seconds during an alarm after the Alarm Silence key is pressed and every two minutes during a trouble condition after the Acknowledge Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed The beeps from the onboard piezo sounder will occur until the alarm or fault is cleared Note that if the trouble is not cleared within 24 hours the piezo will resound indicating that the trouble condition still exists 4 20 4 Waterflow Retard Timer If selected this option will delay the activation of a waterflow type alarm for a programmable time duration from 1 to 90 seconds This delay is in addition to any time delay inherent in the waterflow device This feature requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction 4 20 5 Alarm Verification None or One Minute If alarm verification is selected an addressable smoke detector s alarm is ignored for a retard time of 13 seconds and the detector s alarm condition is automatically reset There will be no alarm indication at the FACP during the Retard period A confirmation period of 60 seconds follows during which a subsequent alarm from the same detector will cause the panel to immediately activate the appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP If a differ
255. ries devices and legacy 300 Series devices along with the MS 9200UDLS FACP offer the latest in fire protection technology The power supply and all electronics are contained on a single circuit board housed in a metal cabinet providing a complete fire control system for most applications Optional modules which plug into the main circuit board are available for special functions Available accessories include LED graphic and LCD annunciators reverse polarity city box transmitter local and remote upload download software and remote power expansion The integral DACT transmits system status alarms troubles AC loss etc to a Central Station via the public switched telephone network It also allows remote programming or interrogation of the control panel using the PS Tools Upload Download utility via the public switched telephone network Local programming and interrogation is also possible using the PS Tools and the USB port J12 on the FACP Any personal computer with Windows XP or greater and compatible modem with a speed of 2400 baud or faster and PS Tools software may serve as a Service Terminal This allows download of the entire program or upload of the entire program history file walktest data current status and system voltages MS 9200UDLS is used in this manual to refer to both the MS 9200UDLS 120 VAC version and the MS 9200UDLSE 240 VAC version FACPs Inventory When MS 9200UDLS shipment is received check that all pa
256. river Modules Document 50055 LCD 80F Remote Fire Annunciator Document 51338 ACM SRF Relay Control Module Document 50362 IPDACT Communicator Transmitter Document 53109 ANN 80 Product Installation Document Document 527749 ANN R LED Product Installation Doc Document 53032 ANN I O Product Installation Document Document 151416 ANN RLY Product Installation Document Document 53033 ANN S PG Product Installation Document Document 151417 ACC 25 50 ZS T Manual Document 52750 This product has been certified to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems UL 864 9th Edition Operation of this product with products not tested for UL 864 9th Edition has not been evaluated Such operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 11 1po o e S TP Z6 peiuur1 4e9ModuoN eur euoug LOVA ooejioju ZSd Q 3NI13NOHd 235 3NI13NOHd IHd CO e eee eee ee ee oe ll Lt 3ALLOV OAS 3 3ALLOV THd 9L Hd jh OVdA3M Ayan olf pue jeuosied _ 00 10 Z Lf GSN y 9r 8 Sf ees pejreisur JIA LX asiAsodns oj siy 1n2 I a J OL LAND ear Es
257. rogrammed as a supervisory relay Cutting JP2 will allow the 4XTMF to generate a trouble if the supervisory contact opens Leaving JP2 in will prevent generation of a trouble if the supervisory contact opens 2 9 2 Printer A serial printer may be connected to TB8 Terminals 1 4 on the FACP The printer can be used to provide a hard copy printout of real time events history file and walktest data Installation the device requires panel programming to allow the FACP to communicate with the device 01 27 09 57 Installation 58 A A parallel printer may also be connected to the FACP using the optional ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Module Refer to ANN S PG Serial Parallel Interface Installation on page 31 for installation details Refer to ANN BUS Options on page 118 for programming information CAUTION Do not connect a printer or PC to the MS 9200UDLS FACP if a ground fault zero impedance to ground exists on the control panel Circuit damage may result Remove all power Primary and Secondary before installing or removing any wiring Installation Remote printers and PCs require separate primary power Also required is the PRT PK CABLE which is an interface cable prewired to a DB9F connector Wire the PRT PK CABLE to TB8 Terminals 1 4 as illustrated in the following figure Connect the DB9F connector to the printer or PC serial EIA 232 port If a nine pin serial connector is not available on the printer or PC use a DB2
258. rts have been included in shipment The MS 9200UDLS shipment consists of one of each of the following V main circuit board with display V backbox with door V plastic bag containing screws cables key etc manual 1 1 Features and Options 14 New LiteSpeed polling protocol for faster SLC response time e SLC operates up to 10 000 ft 3 000 m in LiteSpeed mode with twisted unshielded wire refer to Wire Requirements on page 205 Built in DACT Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter e Single addressable SLC loop which meets NFPA Style 4 6 and 7 requirements 198 addressable device capacity 99 detectors and 99 control relay monitor modules e 99 software zones Onboard NACs Notification Appliance Circuits which can be configured as four Style Y Class B or two Style Z Class A circuits special application 3 0 amps total power for NACs and 24 VDC special application auxiliary power outputs expandable to 6 0 amps e 3 6 amps total system power includes battery charger expandable to 6 6 amps Two programmable relay outputs and one fixed trouble relay e Synchronization output for remote power supply applications special application e Built in Programmer Telephone Line Active LEDs MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description Communication Confirmation Kissoff LED Touchtone Rotary dialing Programmable Make Break Ratio e 232 Printer PC interface variable baud rate
259. s and 16 yellow trouble LEDs In addition it has a System Trouble LED an On Line Power LED and a local piezo sounder e AEM 16ATF Annunciator Expander Module annunciates 16 zones with 16 red alarm LEDs and 16 yellow trouble LEDs e ACM 32AF Annunciator Control Module annunciates 32 alarm zones with 32 red LEDs In addition it has a System Trouble LED an On Line Power LED and a local piezo sounder It also has a switch for local piezo silence e AEM 32AF Annunciator Expander Module annunciates 32 alarm zones with 32 red LEDs n Canada the color red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs Yellow indicates supervisory burglary or trouble signals Green indicates the presence of power or an activated output LCD 80F Remote Fire Annunciator The LCD 80F annunciator is an 80 character backlit LCD remote fire annunciator that is capable of displaying English language text Communications between the control panel and the annunciator is accomplished over a serial interface employing the EIA LI 485 communication standard Up to 32 LCD 80F annunciators may be connected to uq the EIA 485 circuit The annunciators may be powered from the host FACP or a Manual remote UL listed filtered power supply such as the FCPS Series For more detailed information refer to the LCD 80F manual LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules Graphic Annunciator The LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules which consist of the LDM 32F master and LDM E32F expander modules ar
260. s and ANN BUS Enabled No 3 6 9 1 3 2 Modules Installed If an ANN BUS module is installed press 2 for Modules Installed while viewing ANN BUS screen 1 to select ANN BUS addresses for the module s The following screen will be displayed ANN BUS MODULES 1 HDDR 1 NONE 2 HDDR 2 SJ HDDR 3 ANN BUS Modules Screen 1 Pressing the down arrow key will allow the programmer to view additional screens displaying Addresses 1 8 To select one or more addresses for the installed module s press the number key corresponding to the module address in each screen The following screen will be displayed for each address HhHH BUS MODULES HHH BUS ADDRESS 1 TYPE ANN BUS Address Screen 118 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 Programming Pressing for Type will display the following screens ANN BUS MODULE TYPE 1 HOT INSTALLED 2 HHMhN S8B8 MODULE S ANH I 0 MODULE Module Type Screen 1 ANN BUS MODULE TYPE 1 ANN S PG MODULE Z2 HHNH LED MODULE S HANN RLY Module Type Screen 2 ANN BUS MODULE 1 ZHHH RHUD IO Module Type Screen 3 Press the number corresponding to the module device type that is installed with the selected address Note If the module type selected is the ANN SO ANN S PG or ANN AUDIO or if Not Installed 1s selected the ANN BUS Address Screen shown on the previous page will be displayed following the module sel
261. s the three levels of maintenance alert Maintenance Level FACP Status Displays Indicates Low Chamber Value I HUEEF A hardware problem in the detector Maintenance Alert DIFET 1 Dust accumulation that 1s near but below the allowed limit DIRTY 1 indicates the need for maintenance before the performance of the detector is compromised Maintenance Urgent DIETYZ Dust accumulation above the allowed limit Table 4 1 Maintenance Alert Levels Figure 4 1 illustrates a graphic representation of the maintenance levels Maintenance Urgent _ Maintenance Alert Acceptable Range Low Chamber Reading Figure 4 1 Diagram of Maintenance Levels MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 179 Operating Instructions 4 22 16 Time Date MEHO Ses The operator can view the daylight savings time and the month and week when daylight savings 1 TIME DRHTE THE e time will begin and end Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen 6 will display the following screens Read Status Screen 6 DAYLIGHT SAYINGS d ENABLED YES START MONTH MAR START WEEK 2 DAYLIGHT SAYINGS d END MONTH HOL END WEEK WEEK 1 180 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Central Station Communications SECTION 5 Central Station Communications The control panel transmits zone and system status reports to Central Stations via the public switched telephone network Two supervised telephone line connections are made to interface the control panel to
262. s zone to indicate a Pre signal condition After the programmed delay the NACs will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared Note that if a second alarm occurs during the programmed time delay the alarm will be processed immediately causing activation of the appropriate output zones The events which occur upon Presignal activation are as follows V onboard piezo sounds immediately V control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point V control points programmed to Zone 98 will activate v annunciators if enabled will sound the local piezo and pulse the alarm LED and zone LED V outputs NACs and control modules of associated zones will be inhibited from activating for a user programmed time delay of up to three minutes V second alarm occurring anytime during the time delay will cause immediate activation of all associated outputs Presignal does not affect monitor modules programmed as waterflow supervisory process monitoring or remote switches Presignal operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Operating Instructions 4 19 Positive Alarm Sequence PAS Positive Alarm Sequence option will program a smoke detector to delay panel activation including alarm relay and communicator for a period of 15 seconds Zone 97 however will activate immediately and may be used to connect a signaling device to indicate PAS activation Do
263. sed as a descriptor for the location of the detector currently being 72 Noun Adjective Screen programmed When an adjective has been selected it will appear at the top of the display as indicated by the asterisks delete dee eee e eet IRD annee 1 NORTH 1 3RD 2 50UTH 2 4TH 3 EAST 3 5TH Adjective Screen 1 Adjective Screen 5 1 FLOOR1 2 FLOOR2 S FLOORS 1 5 2 FRONT 3 CENTER Adjective Screen 2 Adjective Screen 6 1 REHR li 1 FLOOR4 f 2 UPPER 2 FLOORS 3 LOWER 3 RO0M Adjective Screen 3 Adjective Screen 7 e ele 1 2 FIRST 3 2ND Adjective Screen 4 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun Adjective Screen will cause the following 1 STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 STOMDBORD NOUN screen s to be displayed Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed 3 CUSTOM ADJECTIVE to see all the Noun screens Press the number corresponding to the noun that is to 4 CUSTOM NOUN be used as a descriptor for the location of the detector currently being programmed When a noun has been selected it will appear at the top of the display as indicated by the asterisks Noun Adjective Screen defendens eof 1 KITCHEM 1 BASEMENT 2 BO ILER S3 LCLLRHSSRDOUN LOBBY 3 0FF ICE Noun Screen 1 Noun Screen 5
264. select addresses for the ACS annunciators The following screen will be displayed ANNUNCIATOR 1 ADDRESS 1 WES 2 HDDRESS 2 S HDDRESS 3 HO ACS Installed Screen Pressing the down arrow key will allow the programmer to view additional screens displaying Addresses 1 31 Each screen will indicate if an address has been used for an installed ACS annunciator To select one or more addresses for the installed ACS annunciator s press the number key corresponding to the address in each screen The display for the selected address will change from No to Yes Each press of the number key will cause the display to toggle between No and Yes The address of each installed annunciator must be enabled to allow communication between the FACP and annunciator 116 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming Annunciator addressing is specific to the MS 9200UDLS control panel The following table describes the annunciator addresses and the corresponding addressable devices that will be annunciated at each annunciator address ACSAnnunciator Address Annunciator Displays the Following Points 5 General System Status Points amp Zones 1 Zones 57 99 amp 4 NACs L C Loop Module Addresses 1 64 not used SLC Loop Module Addresses 65 99 not used L C Loop Detector Addresses 1 64 not used SLC Loop Detector Addresses 65 99 not used not used not used not used not used not used Zones 57 99 amp
265. ses A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by ACTA This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or pre mises wiring using a compliant RJ31X male modular plug and compatible modular jack that is also compliant 01 27 09 43 Product Description 44 1 10 4 For Canadian Applications The following is excerpted from CP 01 Issue 5 NOTICE The Industry Canada IC label identifies certified equipment This certifica tion means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equip ment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be con nected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of ser vice in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telec
266. supervised and power limited Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for a listing of compatible notification appliances The NACS which are located on the main circuit board may be expanded via the FCPS Series field charger power supplies The following sections describe the configuration and wiring of Style Y and Style Z Notification Appliance Circuits on the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board The NACs are configured for Style Y Class B from the factory Refer to Configuring NACs on page 51 for information on changing the NAC configuration to Style Z Class A MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Installation 2 5 1 Configuring NACs The Notification Appliance Circuits on the main circuit board are configured for Style Y Class B or Style Z Class A by properly orienting the NACKEY card in JP6 which is located at the top of the main circuit board near the NAC terminal blocks TB3 and TB4 The default configuration is for Style Y Class B Refer to Figure 2 7 for information on installing the NACKEY card Style Z Class A install NACKEY into JP6 with Class A pointing down toward circuit board as NACKEY Card illustrated to the right Style Y Class B install NACKEY into JP6 with VOd A3XOVN Class B pointing down toward circuit board iita M A ey CLASS A NACKEY must be inserted with text side facing in toward center of main circuit board and key into key
267. t 0 factory default unlimited 0 for unlimited calling to Central Station for any trouble condition Central Station trouble calls Trouble Call Limit Trouble Call Limit 1 99 limits call for each unique trouble to from 1 to 99 within a 24 hour period Remote Download Refer to Remote Site Upload Download on page 184 Proprietary Yes for Proprietary system intended to protect Remote Download Proprietary Yes only contiguous Remote Download Remote Download Proprietary No properties 3 1 Programming Data Entry Programming can be accomplished using the MS 9200UDLS keypad or by connecting an optional standard computer keyboard The keyboard can be connected to the PS 2 connector J3 on the control panel main circuit board The information presented in this section refers to programming the MS 9200UDLS via the onboard keypad If an optional computer keyboard is connected to the MS 9200UDLS main circuit board the following table describes the keyboard keys which correspond to the onboard keypad keys on QZ key Space bar MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 59 Programming 3 2 User Programming 60 A See Page The MS 9200UDLS is completely field programmable and requires no special software skills While programming the MS 9200UDLS the fire protection capabilities of the control panel are enabled Site specific programming may be accomplished in any of the following ways e Autoprogramming Featur
268. t Screen 1 allows the user to print the History file which will detail all of the system activities since the file was last cleared from memory Pressing 2 while viewing Print Screen 1 allows the user to print the Walktest log which will detail all of the system activations during walktest since the log was last cleared Refer to Walktest on page 113 for additional information on the display Pressing 3 while viewing Print Screen 1 allows the user to print the detector data for each addressable smoke detector connected to the system A printout similar to the following example will be generated if an optional printer is connected to the FACP DEVICE DEVICE TYPE DRIFT COMP CHAMBER TIME DATE 1D001 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1281 12 01AM 01 08 2001 1D002 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1281 12 01AM 01 08 2001 1D003 SMOKE PHOTO 21 1259 12 01AM 01 08 2001 1D004 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1309 12 02AM 01 08 2001 1D005 SMOKE PHOTO 21 1281 12 02AM 01 08 2001 1D006 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1322 12 02AM 01 08 2001 1D007 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1280 12 02AM 01 08 2001 1D008 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1215 12 02AM 01 08 2001 1D009 SMOKE PHOTO 20 1310 12 02AM 01 08 2001 Chamber Value The Chamber value should be within the indicated range for the following smoke detectors e SD350 T D350P R and SD300 T Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors 405 2100 obscuration of 1 00 ft to 3 66 ft e 350 and CP300 Addressable Ionization Smoke Detectors 750 2100 obscuration of 0 50 ft t
269. t devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without output assignments 146 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming 3 7 Maintenance Programming Level To access Maintenance Programming mode press the Enter key The LCD will display the following 1 READ STATUS 2 PROGRAMMING S REMOTE DOWNLOAD To enter the Maintenance Programming mode press 2 The display will read as follows PROGRAMMING ENTER PASSWORD When the Maintenance level password default 77711 is entered the following screen will appear PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM 2 HISTORY S PROGRAM CHECK Note that in the preceding screens an arrow appears to inform the programmer that additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key as shown in the following screen PROGRAMMING 1 WALK TEST 2 SY STEM S Z0NE SETUP MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 147 Programming 3 7 1 Disable Point Pressing for Point Program while viewing Maintenance Screen 1 will cause the 2 HISTORV following screens to be displayed S PROGRAM CHECK PROGRAMMING 1 POINT PROGRAM Maintenance Screen 1 FL I HT FEOGEBII 1 DETECTOR 2 MODULE Device Select Screen Select the device type by pressing for an addressable detector or 2 for an addressable module The operator will be prompted to enter the three digit device address as shown in the following example for a detector EDIT DETECTOR ENTER POINT ADDRESS
270. t the panel s digital communicator be located as the first device on the incoming telephone circuit to properly function Important The must not be used to dial a phone number that is call forwarded RJ31X Jack Customer Premises Equipment and Wiring FACP with DACT Unused RJ 11 Jack Computer 00000000 DDUUUUDU Line Network Demarcation Point 54 Telephone iih Fax Machine 2 Unused RJ 11 Jack Answering System Figure 2 12 DACT Installation FETU PEEP elephone actadact cdr The control panel s digital communicator is built into the main circuit board Connection and wiring of two phone lines is required as shown below o KISSOFF PRI ACTIVE O J15 PRI PHONE LINE r ESZZEBL L_ SEC ACTIVE J16 C SEC PHONE LINE lai Connectors Male Plug Connectors Lines Incoming Telco Phone Lines Tip Green Wire Ring To premise phones Ring Red Wire Tip Green Wire Primary Lines Red Wi Incoming Telco Ring Phone Lines Ring To premise phones zi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R
271. te tee ed ee d odas e deo Damien chs 188 nuc P P 188 How to Use Table 7 3 on page 189 to Calculate System Current Draw 188 Battery SITZ o utese tros e eon dusts aust dee oboe esto 190 INP PA Battery e E oa ties alana Ecc E idm cuu opus ade 190 oSelectine and Locana Batteries s cic tonii E Maie USUS URDU EDI 190 SOW ALC ZONES Ne A T 191 Cone aUos oou setti edd fetu aon ADMI 191 c 197 NEPA Standard S pectic Requirements assis cscsssancncoussssiescswocssucndsastcsnasensatondevensenevsesvaxavnsssvessetesiacesuevenstselpocsssadsoanss 198 Central Station Remote Station Transmitter Connection to FACP Dry Contacts 202 MB T L Municipal Box Trip Silenced ble uius HRS IURI RE tad 203 a ELO DLE m 204 Wire 205 IN NOR ipM P T DP 207 tO cT ES 208 Connort Modul Operation 208 FIV AGC umi au MIU Eia dd iM E 208 Monitor Module Operation 208 Ghat co elo ya cod TS 208 HVAC OVRRIDE
272. ted are to cause fan shutdown to the same software zone refer to Zone Assignment under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Control Modules on page 85 Monitor the control module using an addressable monitor module programmed for Trouble Monitor The monitor module label should be programmed to indicate HVAC SHUTDOWN When the control module is active HVAC SHUTDN the monitor module will indicate a trouble condition at the FACP and the display should indicate the HVAC is shut down Once activated the HVAC SHUTDN control module remains activated even if the FACP is silenced or reset After the alarm condition on the FACP has been cleared and the panel reset the HVAC SHUTDN control module remains activated and the fans remain off The monitor module programmed for Trouble Monitor which is being used to supervise the control module will indicate a trouble condition at the control panel and the LCD should display that the HVAC is shut down The fans can only be restarted when the HVAC SHUTDN control module is deactivated by the HVAC RESTART module F2 Monitor Module Operation F 2 1 HVAC RESTART The HVAC RESTART type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module for the purpose of resetting deactivating the HVAC SHUTDN control module and turning the fans back on The HVAC RESTART monitor module acts globally throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular software zone To program this feature in
273. tes that Zones 05 07 09 10 and 11 have been programmed to an addressable detector with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any output devices Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without output assignments 3 7 4 Walktest To perform a walktest press while viewing Maintenance Screen 2 The following 2 G6VSTEM screen will be displayed 3 20HE SETUP PROGRAMMING 1 WALK TEST Maintenance Screen 2 A L 1 SILEHT 2 HUDIBLE S VIEW RESULT Walktest Screen The operator can press to perform a silent walktest or 2 to perform an audible walktest Pressing 1 or 2 will cause the control panel to enter Walktest Mode and will display the following screen UNIT IM WALKTEST 1 VIEW WALKTEST LOG 2 VTEW POINTS S VIEW SUMMARY Unit In Walktest Screen From this screen it is possible to view the walktest log untested system points or a summary of the addressable devices tested during the current walktest The user can select between any of these screens without interrupting the current walktest session The walktest session will not end until the Unit In Walktest screen is exited by pressing the Escape key to return to the Walktest Screen MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 151 Programming Pressing for View Walktest Log while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will cause screen similar to one of the following two screens to be displayed ALARM MONITOR
274. that flashes to indicate that a smoke detector requires cleaning or replacement due to an invalid chamber reading or excessive drift Alarm Silenced This is a yellow LED that turns on after the Alarm Silence key is pressed while an alarm condition exists It turns off when the Drill or Reset key is pressed Disabled This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate that a zone NAC detector or module has been temporarily disabled in programming by the user Battery This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate a low battery voltage condition Ground This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate a ground fault condition zero impedance from the FACP to ground Primary Line Active This is a red LED that indicates the primary phone line is active Secondary Line Active This is a red LED that indicates the secondary phone line is active Kiss off This is a green LED that blinks when a Central Station has acknowledged receipt of each transmitted message or when a portion of upload or download data has been accepted from a Service Terminal MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 157 Operating Instructions 4 3 Normal Operation With no alarms or troubles in the system the display message is System All Normal along with the current time and date as shown below To set the time and date refer to the appropriate section in this manual HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM ALL NORMAL 16 812166 The MS 9200UDLS performs followin
275. the FACP Program the HVAC RESTART type code to the monitor module which will be used to deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control module and restart the fans refer to Type Monitor under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 76 The HVAC RESTART monitor module does not latch when activated Pressing a switch connected to the monitor module will deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control relay module only if there are no alarm conditions The HVAC SHUTDN control relay module can be deactivated if trouble conditions exist on the FACP 208 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 HVAC Control F 2 2 HVAC OVRRIDE The HVAC OVRRIDE type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module for the purpose of overriding or preventing the HVAC SHUTDN control modules from activating The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor module acts globally throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular software zone To program this feature in the FACP Program the HVAC OVRRIDE type code to the monitor module which will be used to override the HVAC SHUTDN control module and prevent the fans from turning off refer to Type Monitor under the section titled Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module on page 76 The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor module does not latch when activated Activating a switch connected to the monitor module will override all HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules in the system preventing the HVAC SHUTDN modules from activating a
276. the products and systems in which they operate in a proper and workable manner In case of defect secure a Return Material Authorization form from our Return Authorization Department This writing constitutes the only warranty made by Honeywell International Inc with respect to its products Honeywell International Inc does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise or that its products will in all cases provide the protection for which they are installed or intended Buyer acknowledges that Honeywell International Inc is not an insurer and assumes no risk for loss or damages or the cost of any inconvenience transportation damage misuse abuse accident or similar incident HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC GIVES NO WARRANT Y EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTENDS BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC S A PRODUCTS FURTHERMORE HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF OR AS A RESULT OF PERSONAL COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USE OF ITS PRODUCTS This warranty replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Honeywell International Inc
277. the secret code by the control panel before processing of data is allowed If the secret code is not verified the control panel will terminate the request While the control panel is communicating with the Service Terminal one of the DACT s red phone line active LEDs and the green Kissoff LED will turn on steady In order to download the panel whether initiated at the jobsite or remotely the following must be true V The control panel must be in the Normal Mode of operation Downloading is not possible if the panel is in any other mode V There cannot be any active communications ongoing with a Central Station receiver v All active events must be successfully kissed off by the Central Station s The communicator must be in a standby state with no new information waiting to be transmitted to a Central Station MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 185 Remote Site Upload Download 186 6 2 1 Security Features Upload and download with the control panel have been carefully designed to include key security features to ensure proper functionality Any time a transfer is initiated the control panel and the Service Terminal will communicate and transfer data before contacting a Central Station When the data transfers are completed and the control panel disconnects from the Service Terminal the control panel will call the Central Station and report one of the following conditions Upload Download request received Upload and or Downloa
278. to detect smoldering fires better than flam ing fires which have little visible smoke Detectors that have ionizing type sensing chambers tend to detect fast flaming fires better than smoldering fires Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire omoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires caused by arson children playing with matches especially in bedrooms smoking in bed and violent explosions caused by escaping gas improper stor While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates it is not a substitute for fire insurance age of flammable materials etc Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate or reaches a predetermined level Rate of rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time For this reason the rate of rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist Heat detectors are designed to protect property not life IMPORTANT Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring communications signaling and or power lf detectors are not so located a developing fire may d
279. tral Station s Central Station Data Protection The primary and secondary Central Station phone numbers communications format account code test time and programmable event codes are vital Central Station information These blocks of data are protected from partial programming due to faulty phone connections line noise and other errors This prevents the panel from being confused due to a wrong phone number account code test time and most critical formatting errors MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Power Supply Calculations SECTION 7 Power Supply Calculations 7 1 Overview This section contains instructions and tables for calculating power supply currents in alarm and standby conditions This is a four step process consisting of the following 1 Calculating the total amount of AC branch circuit current required to operate the system 2 Calculating the power supply load current for non fire and fire alarm conditions and calculating the secondary battery load 3 Calculating the size of batteries required to support the system if an AC power loss occurs 4 Selecting the proper batteries for your system 7 2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit The control panel requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit which must be labeled FIRE ALARM This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises No other non fire alarm equipment may be powered from the fire alarm bra
280. trol module with address 09 is assigned to three software zones providing floor above and floor below Be careful to properly plan the installation prior to installing any devices MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 191 Software Zones Correlation of Input and Output Zones Input Devices Zones Output Devices CMF 300 Y CMF 300 CP300 SD350 2 S The zone correlations which shown graphically above also presented in Table A 1 on page 193 and Table A 2 on page 194 192 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Software Zones Table A 1 Detector Programming Sheet Example DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Zone ADJ NOUN Address Device Zone ADJ NOUN Type Number Type Number 01 SD350 1 FIRST HALL 51 02 SD350 1 ELEV LOBBY 52 03 CP350 2 2ND FLOOR 53 04 CP350 2 ROOM 210 54 05 SD350 3 3RD FLOOR 55 06 SD350 3 MEZZANINE 56 07 SD350 3 MECH ROOM 57 10 60 12 62 14 64 16 66 18 68 20 70 23 73 25 75 27 77 29 79 31 81 33 83 34 84 36 86 38 88 40 90 42 92 44 94 46 96 47 97 49 99 MS 9200UDLS PN52750 E1 01 27 09 193 Software Zones Table A 2 Module Programming Sheet Example MONITOR CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Zone ADJ Address Device Zone ADJ NOUN Type Number NOUN Type Number 01 MMF 300 1 51 03 MMF 302 1 2 53 05 CMF 300 1 55 06 CMF 300 1 56 07 300 1 37 08 CMF 300 2 58 09 CMF 300 12 5 59 10 300 2 60 11 300 3 61 12 CMF 300 3 62 13
281. trouble condition after the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge key is pressed The piezo will continue to sound at these rates until the alarm or trouble condition is cleared If the trouble condition is not cleared within 24 hours the panel will reactivate the trouble sounder and retransmit the trouble condition to the central station if connected e Banner This option allows the user to change the top two lines of the LCD display from the blank factory default readout to a user defined readout when the control panel is in Normal condition Time Date This feature allows the programmer to set the time display format 24 hr or 12 hr date and daylight savings time feature into the FACP memory e Timers This option allows the programmer to set the PAS Positive Alarm Sequence time delay Pre Signal time delay and Waterflow time delay e NACs This feature allows the programmer to configure the control panel Notification Appliance Circuits for a variety of options such as circuit type silenceable nonsilenceable autosilence coding silence inhibit zone assignment and enable disable e Relays This option allows programming of two onboard relays for activation by various control panel events such as alarm trouble supervisory etc Canadian Option This option allows the automatic programming of ionization smoke detector sensitivity thresholds to Canadian specifications Waterflow Silenceable This option provides the ability to sile
282. ts Press the up or down arrow keys to view zones ZOO through Z99 Zone types can be changed by pressing the keypad number key corresponding to the zone 1n each Zones Installed Screen Available zone types will be displayed in the resultant screens For example to change the zone type for zone Z02 in the screen illustrated above press 3 The following screens will be displayed ONE TYPE PROG ONE TYPE PROG 1 MONITOR 1 MEDICAL 2 SMOKE PHOTO 2 HHZHRED S WATERFLOW 5 THMPER Zone Type Program Screen 1 Zone Type Program Screen 3 ONE TYPE PROG ONE TYPE PROG 1 HEHT 1 ZSUPERUISOR 2 PULL STATION 2 PROC MON S DUCT S SMOKE ION Zone Type Program Screen 2 Zone Type Program Screen 4 To change the zone type for Z02 to Pull Station scroll the display until Zone Type Program Screen 2 is displayed Press 2 to program zone Z02 as a Pull Station zone The display will return to the Zones Installed Screen showing zone Z02 and the Pull Station program type Repeat the procedure for each zone to be changed IMPORTANT In Zone Type Program Screen 1 selecting WATERFLOW will assign a Waterflow silenceable zone type to the selected zone Any signaling devices programmed to the same zone can be silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by using the auto silence feature To program a waterflow circuit as nonsilenceable refer to System Setup on page 97 Note Zone Types are only relevant for Central Station reportin
283. tup Loop Setup allows the programmer to configure the SLC Loop for NFPA Style 4 6 or 7 wiring and to select the loop protocol Pressing while viewing Programming Screen 2 will cause the following screen to be displayed LOOP SETUP 1 STYLE 4 2 PRO TOCOL LITESPEED Loop Setup Screen 3 6 4 1 Style To program the SLC Style for the selected loop press for Style while viewing Loop Setup Screen In the preceding example the control panel is programmed for Style 4 SLC wiring as indicated by the 4 to the right of Style in the display To change the wiring style press to toggle the display to read Style 6 Each press of the key will cause the display to toggle between Style 4 and Style 6 Note that when programming the Loop Style the programmer can only select between Style 4 and Style 6 To program a system for Style 7 wiring the programmer must select the Loop Setup for Style 6 Style 7 wiring is the same as Style 6 with the added requirement that each addressable device on the loop must have a pair of isolator modules one on each side MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Programming Note on SLC Troubles If the FACP reports an open fault on an SLC Loop programmed for Style 6 the trouble condition will latch at the FACP When the SLC Loop has been repaired the Reset button must be pressed at the FACP at least 2 minutes after the trouble has been repaired to clear the SLC trouble 3 6 4 2 Loop Protocol Loop Protocol
284. unciator has been mounted 1 8 7 3 4 Opening Closing Annunciator The following procedure details the steps used to open the annunciator in order to access the terminal block and DIP switches refer to figure below 1 Turn the key switch to the ON Unlocked position by turning the key counter clockwise 2 Push in the snap latch located on the right side of the unit while pulling the cover open 3 Toclose the cover make certain the key switch is in the ON Unlocked position Swing the cover closed snapping it shut 4 Turn the key switch to the OFF Locked position by turning clockwise and remove the key MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Product Description Annunciator cover with LCD display e lt q Annunciator backplate Press in latch and pull y 1 Key switch shown in ON position py 1 8 7 3 5 Wiring ANN 80 to FACP The following steps can be used as a guide to wire the annunciator Make certain all power has been removed from the FACP prior to annunciator installation 1 Route wires from hole in backplate through wiring channel and then to ANN 80 terminal block TBI 4 Za 258858 O O wiring channel _1 fy wires al l
285. und fault 58 setup 58 Printer PC interface 15 Process Monitor 162 PROCMON AR 110 Program check 145 check correlations 145 clear 144 Program Check Maintenance Level 150 program keys see also Key Panel 18 Programming 59 60 autoprogramming 60 exiting 61 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 factory default 197 Level 1 61 Level 2 61 manual 60 Master Level 1 63 modules 75 off line computer 60 via computer keyboard 59 via panel keypad 59 Programming Levels 61 Programming Screens 61 Programming Sheet 193 194 195 Programming Utility see also PK CD 22 Proprietary Yes see also Remote Upload 185 PRT PK CABLE for PC Printer connection 58 R Read Status 60 168 annunciators 174 176 exiting 61 history 174 NAC 173 power 171 Print 178 printer PC 177 program check 174 relay 173 system point 169 Time Date 180 timers 172 trouble reminder 172 zones 170 Real Time Clock 163 Recall Increment Function 74 84 9 Receivers 183 Relay 16 19 50 110 connections 50 contact rating 16 19 50 fixed 50 Form C 16 110 programmable 14 19 50 programming 110 selections 110 trouble 14 19 50 Relay Control Module see also 8 41 Relay options 97 221 Remote Download 184 Remote Programming 60 Remote Station Service 56 remote switch functions 15 remote sync output 17 Remote Synchronization 52 REN see also Ringer Equivalence Number 42 Report Style 141 Reporting Enable 133 Reset 18 156 R
286. will turn on whenever the control panel has successfully transmitted reports to the Central Station The Kissoff LED may turn on several times during communications with a Central Station 182 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 Central Station Communications The table below shows UL listed receivers which are compatible with the MS 9200UDLS Table 5 1 Compatible UL Listed Receivers c e om S 9 amp x M o Bol d z 2c 26 a T EM da 39 EZ 3B 2X Oe oS Oe ci 29 385 2 2E 22 ES ES ER oc Format 42 AS AS OA 24 A N AN A 2 O Gomes e Iv iw no mexem iv 1 ew fe With 685 8 Line Card with Rev 4 4d software With 124060V206B and 124063 Line Card Rev B With version V2 4 Receiver and 126047 Line Card Rev G With 124077V2 00 Receiver and 126047 Line Card Rev M With V 7301 Receiver S W With 01 01 03 Receiver S W and Line Card 01 01 03 With software V1 86 With software V1 72 With DSP4016 and V1 6 Line Card Sy Xo cuo ae 10 With software V3 9 IMPORTANT It is the installer s responsibility to ensure that the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter is compatible with the Central Station Receiver utilized by the monitoring service prior to installation The Compatibility Table provides a list of compatible receivers and associated software versions for the receivers Changes in the hardware and or softwa
287. y option allows a user to erase all events from the history file This will provide a clean slate in order to use the history file to track future events Pressing 2 while viewing the History Screen will display the following screen ERASE HISTORY PROCEED 1 YES Erase History Screen Pressing while viewing the Erase History Screen will erase all events from the History file During this process the display will read as follows ERASING HISTORY PLEASE WHIT Erase History Wait Screen After the History file has been erased the display will return to the History Screen 112 MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 PROGRAMMING 1 HISTORY 2 WALK TEST S OPTION MODULES Programming Screen 3 Programming 3 6 8 Walktest Walktest allows an individual to test the fire alarm system without the necessity to reset the control panel after each device activation Pressing 2 while viewing the Programming Screen 3 will cause the following Walktest options to be displayed WALK TEST 1 SILENT 2 HUDIBLE S VIEW RESULT Walktest Screen To perform a silent walktest which will not sound the NACs press 7 while viewing the Walktest Screen To perform an audible walktest which will sound the NACs press 2 while viewing the Walktest Screen When either option is chosen the panel will enter Walktest Mode and the following screen will be displayed UNIT IM WALKTEST 1 VIEW WALKTEST LOG 2 VTEW POINTS S VIEW SUMMARY Unit
288. y to toggle between the two options NAC 3 6 5 5 8 Sync Type 1 SYNC TYPE If synchronized strobes were selected as the Type of device installed the type of synchronization must be selected in this option Pressing while viewing NAC NAC Screen 4 will cause the following screen to be displayed NAC SYNC TYPE 1 SYSTEM SENSOR 2 WHEELOCK S5 GENTEs Pressing while viewing this screen will select System Sensor synchronization 2 will select Wheelock and 3 will select Gentex 3 6 5 5 8 1 Maximum Number of Strobes for Synchronization The total current draw for each Notification Appliance Circuit cannot exceed 2 5 amps Refer to the manufacturer s documentation supplied with the Strobes to determine the maximum current draw for each strobe and ensure that the circuit maximum is not exceeded To ensure proper strobe and circuit operation there is also a limit to the number of strobes that can be attached to each circuit Following is a list of the strobes that have been tested with this FACP and the maximum number that can be connected to each NAC Make sure that the NAC maximum current is not exceeded V System Sensor 40 Strobes Wheelock 25 Strobes Gentex 23 Strobes MS 9200UDLS PN 52750 E1 01 27 09 109 Programming SYSTEM SETUP 3 6 5 6 Relays 1 TIMERS Pressing 3 while viewing System Setup Screen 2 will allow the programmer to configure two main circuit board Form C relays from the following screen 2 N

52750 REV 2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents